Home

Roland Prelude User's Manual

1. No Name Category MSB LSB PC No Name Category MSB LSB PC 51 Chapel Organ ORGAN 87 65 23 228 SC Rubber Bs SYNTH BASS 87 65 100 52 Grand Pipe ORGAN 87 65 24 229 SH 101 Bs 1 SYNTH BASS 87 65 101 53 Pipe Org Mod ORGAN 87 65 25 230 SC Syn Bass SYNTH BASS 87 65 102 54 Masked Opera ORGAN 87 65 26 231 uno 106 Bs SYNTH BASS 87 65 103 55 Mid Pipe Org ORGAN 87 65 27 232 Smooth Bass SYNTH BASS 87 65 104 56 Vodkakordion ACCRDION 87 65 28 233 SC Flat Bs SYNTH BASS 87 65 105 57 Squeeze Me ACCRDION 87 65 29 234 Foundation SYNTH BASS 87 65 106 58 Guinguette ACCRDION 87 65 30 235 Punch MG 2 SYNTH BASS 87 65 107 59 HarWonderca HARMONICA 87 65 31 236 Electro Rubb SYNTH BASS 87 65 108 60 V S HARMONICA 87 65 32 237 R amp B Bass 1 SYNTH BASS 87 65 109 61 Green Bullet HARMONICA 87 65 33 238 Enorjizor SYNTH BASS 87 65 110 62 SC Brt Nylon AC GUITAR 87 65 34 239 LowFat Bass SYNTH BASS 87 65 11
2. No Name Category MSB LSB PC No Name Category MSB LSB PC 1 Rich Grand AC PIANO 87 54 1 76 FunkyD KEYBOARDS 87 64 76 2 88ConceriPno AC PIANO a7 lea 2 77 Phase Clavi KEYBOARDS 87 64 77 3 UllimatGrand AC PIANO 87 eal 3 78 Clavi Ph KEYBOARDS 87 64 78 4 X Pure Grand AC PIANO a7 ea 79 Pulse Clavi KEYBOARDS 87 64 79 5 So tue AC PIANO 87 54 5 80 PWM Clav KEYBOARDS 87 64 80 amp ConceriPiano AC PIANO a7 e4 6 81 Funky Line KEYBOARDS 87 64 8l Z Warm Piano AC PIANO a7 ea 17 82 Biting Clav KEYBOARDS 87 64 82 8 ConcertGrand AC PIANO 87 64 8 83 Analog Clavi KEYBOARDS 87 64 83 9 Hall Concert AC PIANO 87 64 1 9 84 Reso Clavi KEYBOARDS 87 64 84 10 Bright Tune AC PIANO SAET 85 Snappy Clav KEYBOARDS 87 64 85 11 Mellow Tune AC PIANO 87 64 n 86 Over D KEYBOARDS 87 64 86 12 Studio Grand AC PIANO 87 64 12 87 Harpsy Clavi KEYBOARDS 87 64 8 13 DryStudio88 AC PIANO 87 64 13 88 SCHarpsi KEYBOARDS 87 64 88 14 First Choice AC PIANO 87 64 14 87
3. No Name Category MSB LSB PC 459 Stimulation HARD LEAD 87 67 75 460 BodyElectric HARD LEAD 87 67 76 461 Classic Lead HARD LEAD 87 67 77 462 Feat Lead HARD LEAD 87 67 78 463 Wire Sync HARD LEAD 87 67 79 464 Epic Lead HARD LEAD 87 67 80 465 Bag Lead HARD LEAD 87 67 81 466 Wezcoast HARD LEAD 87 67 82 467 HyperJupiter HARD LEAD 87 67 83 468 Vintagolizer HARD LEAD 87 67 84 469 C64 Lead HARD LEAD 87 67 85 470 303 NRG HARD LEAD 87 67 86 471 Cell Squlead SOFT LEAD 87 67 87 472 SC Sqr Lead SOFT LEAD 87 67 88 473 SH Sqr Lead SOFT LEAD 87 67 89 474 Round SQR SOFT LEAD 87 67 90 475 Windy Synth SOFT LEAD 87 67 91 476 Sqr Diamond SOFT LEAD 87 67 92 477 Sinetific SOFT LEAD 87 67 93 478 PeakArpSine SOFT LEAD 87 67 94 479 Howards Lead SOFT LEAD 87 67 95 480 SoloNzPeaker SOFT LEAD 87 67 96 481 Juno Sfild SOFT LEAD 87 67 97 482 R amp B Trilead SOFT LEAD 87 67 98 483 R amp B Tri Ld2 SOFT LEAD 87 67 99 484 Jupiter Lead SOFT LEAD 87 67 00 485
4. XOXXXXOxXOOOOOOOOOOOOOOXXOOOOOXXXXOOXOOOXXOO System S Select Common IRERE Tune System Clock l 1 Realtime Command A 1 3 All Sound Off Aux Reset All Controllers Local ON OFF All Note Off Active Sensing System Reset 1 123 127 1 is selectable 2 Recognized as 1 even if M1 3 Transmitted from Backing Track Mode 1 OMNI ON POLY Mode 2 OMNI ON MONO O Yes Mode 3 OMNI OFF POLY Mode 4 OMNI OFF MONO X 104 Specifications Prelude Music Keykoard Conforms to General MIDI 2 System E Keyboard 61 keys with velocity E Sound Generator Maximum Polyphony 128 voices Parts 16 parts Keyboard part Wave Memory 256 MB 16 bit linear equivalent Preset Memory Performances 128 Tones 896 256 GM2 World Rhythm Sets 32 9 GM2 World User Memory Performances 128 Effects MFX Upper and Lower 78 types Chorus 3 types Reverb 5 types E Backing Track Backing type Style Song USB Memory Player Tempo MIDI Style Song 20 to 250 USB Memory Player 5 to 300 Style Variations A Intro 4 Main 4 Ending 4 Fill In Sync Start Stop One Touc
5. FILTER 10 types DELAY 13 types 01 EQUALIZER P 58 43 DELAY p 71 02 SPECTRUM P 58 44 LONG DELAY p 71 03 ISOLATOR P 58 45 SERIAL DELAY P Z1 04 LOW BOOST P 58 46 MODULATION DELAY P 72 05 SUPER FILTER P 59 47 3TAP PAN DELAY 72 06 STEP FILTER P 59 48 ATAP PAN DELAY P 72 07 ENHANCER p 59 49 MULTI TAP DELAY p 73 08 AUTO WAH P 60 50 REVERSE DELAY p 73 09 HUMANIZER P 60 51 SHUFFLE DELAY 73 10 SPEAKER SIMULATOR P 60 52 3D DELAY 74 MODULATION 12 types 53 TIME CTRL DELAY 74 11 PHASER P 61 54 LONG TIME CTRL DLY P 74 12 STEP PHASER P 61 55 TAPE ECHO p 75 13 MULTI STAGE PHASER P 61 LO FI 5 types 14 INFINITE PHASER P 62 56 LOFI NOISE P 75 15 RING MODULATOR P 62 57 LOFI COMPRESS 5 16 STEP RING MODULATOR P 62 58 LOFI RADIO P 76 17 TREMOLO P 62 59 TELEPHONE P 76 18 AUTO PAN P 63 60 PHONOGRAPH P 76 19 STEP PAN P 63 PITCH 3 types 20 SLICER P 63 61 PITCH SHIFTER P 76 21 ROTARY P 64 62 2VOI PITCH SHIFTER P 77 22 VK ROTARY P 64 63 STEP PITCH SHIFTER P 77 CHORUS 12 types REVERB 2 types 23 CHORUS P 64 64 REVERB P 77 24 FLANGER P 65 65 GATED REVERB P 78 25 STEP FLANGER P 65 COMBINATION 12 types 26 HEXA CHORUS P 65 66 OVERDRIVE CHORUS P 78 27 TREMOLO CHORUS P 66 67 OVERDRIVE FLANGER P 78 28 SPACE D P 66 68 OVERDRIVE DELAY P 78 29 3D CHORUS P 66 69
6. The pedal will trigger fill in and then the next variation will play FILL UP e g from MAIN 1 to 2 Once you reach variation 4 subsequent presses of the pedal will not change the variation any farther The pedal will trigger fill in and then the previous variation will play Pedal FILL e g from MAIN 4 to 3 Once Assign DOWN you reach variation 1 subsequent presses of the pedal will not change the variation any farther The pedal will switch to the next Fin Performance i e from PERFORM 001 to 002 PERFORM The pedal will switch to the previous DOWN Performance i e from PERFORM 002 to 001 Switches the polarity of the pedal connected to the CONTROL PEDAL jack Some pedals will operate in the Pedal STANDARD opposite of the expected way when Polarity REVERSE you press them If you re using this type of pedal set this parameter to REVERSE If you re using a Roland pedal without a polarity switch use STANDARD Switches the polarity of the pedal mn connected to the HOLD PEDAL jack See Pedal Polarity above SYSTEM D BEAM Parameter Value Explanation This sets the D Beam controller s D Beam 0 127 sensitivity The higher the value set Sens the more readily the D Beam controller goes to into erect D Beam Filter As signable 1 DBeam Refer to Functions that can be assigned 34 Volume Assign able 2
7. 28 Cursor butions scere ku S Sas 11 16 Lm 38 D D Beam Assignable visa S epe EGER ERAS 46 Assighidble 2 ele ione t 46 Coniroll rs orem ree rt EG 34 NI Je 34 SENSA iea Debt Toa un a um bs 46 Data Structure in USB Memory 49 DC IN jack eee ee nes 12 14 Decay lime aa am ha tete hasa 38 Delay sss a usa nah an 82 Deleting SONG upa apaq T 29 Song from ploylisf_ asa 33 Demo Song eere aree e bee e HI e ERA 17 Display Contrast m 16 PEE 19 sss ERN 19 E Editing Performance ee ean dre deter 37 Playlist E anne 33 TONG sa muwu eta sa eee eee aa es 38 EFFECT SEND cs Sct aka eee anh 40 EFFECT SOURCE urna ana aasan qasa ua de eut 41 Effects List aa 56 ENDING h ta 24 ENTER NR MERERI 11 Equal 20 Error Messages AA u O asi 55 F QP 11 Expression pedal uu 15 or tr een 12 15 18 F Factory Reset eee ved ORE hu kuy as 17 Bile MG Me vera 44 54 ee o de 24 FILER Sr TUE 34 Filter D B na ai miter 46 Format USB memory i ees mato 48 KIMA NA suma ERI a eR eg 22 Headphones ana a elu 15 HO
8. Balance D Parameter Value Description Type of filter OFF no filter is used LPF cuts the frequency range Filter Type Sieh HPE above the Cutoff Freq HPF cuts the frequency range below the Cutoff Freq Cutoff Freq 200 8000 Hz Basic frequency of the filter Adjusts the delay time from the di Pre Delay 0 0 100 0 ms rect sound until the chorus sound is heard Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz note Frequency of modulation Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation Phase 0 180 deg Spatial spread of the sound Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Volume balance between direct Balance D100 0W D0 100W sound D and the chorus sound W Level 0 127 Output Level 64 FEE FLANGER This is a stereo flanger The LFO has the same phase for left and right It produces a metallic resonance that rises and falls like a jet airplane taking off or landing A filter is provided so that you can adjust the timbre of the flanged sound Balance D oe Balance W Feedback Feedback 6 ange T y Balance W S 2 Lin L out Rin R out Balance D Parameter Value Description Type of filter OFF no filter is used LPF cuts the frequency range Filter Type HPF above the Cutoff Freq HPF cuts the frequency range below the Cutoff Freq Cutoff Freq 200 8000 Hz Basic frequency of the filter Adjusts the delay time from
9. r a BB o N o g x I N A o YE g g a 103 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 1170 Limiter Kit HipHop Kit 1 R amp B Kit HiFi R amp B Kit Machine Kit1 Kit Euro POP Dance Kick 1 PlasticKick2 70 s Kick MaxLow Kick2 TR909 Kick 2 TR707 Kick HipHop Kick1 Group Snap AnalogKick 6 FB Kick TR909 Kick 4 AnalogKick 1 WD CStk Snr Roll Urbn Sn Roll Rough 1 Light Snr Dirty Snr 6 R amp B Kick 1 AnalogKick 3 HipHop Kick2 MaxLow Kick1 Mix Kick 5 FB Kick Wild Stick GoodOld Snr5 R amp B ShrtSnr1 Rough Kick3 DR660 Snr BrushRoll Dance Kick 2 Dist Kick Old Kick Rk CmpKick Mix Kick 2 PlasticKick2 Hip PHH Noise CHH HipHop CHH TR909 Kick 5 TR808 PHH Reg CHH 2 LD Kick TR707 Kick EuroHit Kick Rough Kickib AnalogKick 6 Power Kick R amp B Kick 2 Dry Kick 4 TR909 Kick 1 R amp B Kick 70 s Kick 1 TR909 Kick 6 Lo Bit Stk 2 Jazz Rim Dry Stick 4 Hard Stick TR808 Rim R amp B ShrtRim1 Wild Stick Dirty Snr 2 Dirty Snr 2 GoodOld Snr3 Jngl pktSnr1 TR909 Snr 3 Dist Clap Old Clap Maple Snr GoodOld Snr4 Funk Clap T
10. ES C3 a a BB 4 o N GM Group 1185 PC 1 1186 PC 9 1187 PC 17 1188 PC 25 1189 26 1190 PC 33 GM2 STANDARD GM2 ROOM GM2 POWER GM2 ELECTRIC GM2 ANALOG GM2 JAZZ High Q High Q High Q High Q High Q High Q Slap Slap Slap Slap Slap Slap Scratch Push Scratch Push Scratch Push Scratch Push Scratch Push Scratch Push Scratch Pull Scratch Pull Scratch Pull Scratch Pull Scratch Pull Scratch Pull Sticks Sticks Sticks Sticks Sticks Sticks Square Click Square Click Square Click Square Click Square Click Square Click Metron Click Metron Click Metron Click Metron Click Metron Click Metron Click Metron Bell Metron Bell Metron Bell Metron Bell Metron Bell Metron Bell Kick Drum 2 Kick Drum 2 Power Kick 2 Kick Drum 2 Kick Drum 2 Jazz Kick 2 Kick Drum 1 Kick Drum 1 Power Kick 1 Elec Kick 1 Ana Kick 1 Jazz Kick 1 Side Stick Side Stick Side Stick Side Stick Ana Rim Sho Side Stick Aco Snare Aco Snare PowerSnareDr E SnareDrum1 Ana Snare 1 Aco Snare Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Elec Snare Elec Snare Elec Snare E SnareDrum2 Elec Snare Elec Snare Low Tom 2 Room LowTom2 PowerLowTom2 E Low Tom 2 Ana Low Tom2 Low Tom 2 ClosedHi hat ClosedHi hat ClosedHi hat ClosedHi hat Ana ClosedHH ClosedHi hat Low Tom 1 Room
11. Parameter Value Description Type of filter OFF no filter is used x LPF cuts the frequency range Filter Type OFE LEF HPE above the Cutoff Freq HPF cuts the frequency range below the Cutoff Freq Cutoff Freq 200 8000 Hz Basic frequency of the filter Adjusts the delay time from when Pre Delay 0 0 100 0 ms the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz note Frequency of modulation Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation Phase 0 180 deg Spatial spread of the sound High Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz note und is modulated High Depth 0 127 Modulation depth H the high range chorus soun High Phase 0 180 deg Spaciousness of the high range chorus sound Balance D100 0W D0 100W Volume balance of the original sound and chorus sound W Level 0 127 Output volume 67 33 2BAND FLANGER A flanger that lets you apply an effect independently to the low frequency and high frequency ranges Lin High Band Feedback Low Band Feedback High Band Feedback P High Band Flanger P Low Band Flanger d High Band Flanger Split Low Band Feedback Rin a Low Band Flanger O Parameter Range Explanation Split Freq 200 8000 Hz Frequency at which the low and high ranges will be divided Delay time from when the origi Low Pre Delay 0 0 100 0 ms nal sound is heard to when the low range flanger sound is heard Rate at wh
12. re rent 92 Chord Intelligence 102 MIDI Implementation Chart 104 Specifications 105 Index 106 Panel Descriptions Front Panel VOLUME knob This knob controls the volume of the entire Prelude Beware of excessive levels as they may cause the speakers to distort for some sounds Pitch Bend Modulation lever You can raise or lower the pitch by moving this lever to the left or right Push the lever away from yourself to apply modulation normally vibrato to the sound p 36 PHONES 1 amp 2 sockets This is where you can connect two pairs of optional headphones Roland RH 25 RH 50 RH 200 or RH 300 Doing so will switch off the internal speakers D BEAM controller Use this controller simply by moving your hand above it p 34 D BEAM control buttons PITCH Allows you to change the pitch of the notes you are playing simply by moving your hand up and down above the D Beam controller FILTER amp VOLUME Use these buttons to turn the D Beam controller on off or to select the Filter or Volume function p 34 You can also assign other functions to this button STYLE FAMILY buttons These buttons allow you to select one of the twelve Style categories BACKING TRACK section 7 10 BACKING TYPE buttons Use these buttons to select the backing type p 23 BALANCE but
13. aE a 26 Recording a New Song SONG 26 Recording in the Main 26 Recording a specified Part SONG 27 Re recording Your 28 Saving a Song 28 Loading Song Data from USB 29 Deleting a Song 29 Selecting and Playing a Song SONG 29 Moving the playback location of a song 30 Performing along with a song MINUS ONE CENTER 30 Back Up Song 30 Other Functions Related to Song 30 USB Memory Player SMF Audio File 30 Playing Back SMF Audio Files 30 USB Memory Player 31 Song Playback USB MEMORY PLAYER 31 Selecting a playlist and playing it 31 Selecting and playing a song from within a songlist 32 Selecting and playing back external songs without creating apay e eto quce eta 32 Performing along with a song MINUS ONE CENTER CANCEI 32 Editing Playlist titre nee 33 Selecting the playback
14. Parameter Value Explanation Metronome i OFF ON Turns the metronome on off Switch Specifies how the metronome will be sounded ALWAYS Tie intor m will sound at all times if it is turned on The metronome will sound Mode REC only while you re recording a Song p 26 The metronome will sound PLAY when you re playing Style and when you re playing a Song p 24 p 29 Low Adjusts the volume of the Metronome metronome The metronome MEDIUM ee Level will be quiet at Low and HIGH loud at High 5 When yov ve finished making settings press EXIT This setting is saved to the System memory Other Functions cf gt Performance Functions and Effects p 34 Editing a Tone p 38 Master Tune p 45 System Transpose p 45 Backing Track Functions Selecting the Backing Types Style Song USB Memory Player The Prelude allows you to use the following three types of musical backing To switch the backing type use BACKING TYPE STYLE SONG and USB MEMORY PLAYER STYLE p 24 This backing uses the Music Styles The Prelude Style function automatically generates a backing with multiple instruments simply choose one of a variety of Music Styles Styles then use your left hand to specify a chord You can also choose Variations to change the backing in addition to the Intro Main and Ending backing types Using only the drum part of
15. 33 Changing the song 33 Deleting Iheisong itte e n eo tutes 33 Adjusting the volume of each 33 Saving playlist settings to USB memory WRITE 33 Performance Functions and Effects 34 Performance Features 34 D Beam Conrroller aa 34 Assigning a function to D Beam controller 34 Pitch Bend and Modulation 36 Assignable Pedal a 3 Using Preset 36 Selecting a Performance PERFORM 36 Using VALUE didl soa te te t 36 Choosing from the Performance list 36 Editing a 37 Editing a Tone 38 Editing a Tone in detail sse 38 Saving a Performance 39 Other Functions Related to Performance 39 Using Reverb Chorus and MFX Effects REVERB reste bue Peco m 40 Editing the Reverb Chorus and MFX Effects 40 Using MIDI 42 MIDI Chonnels 42 MIDI Parameters 42 Local Swilch 42 Using the Prelude as a MIDI
16. 2000Hz 15 15 dB Gain of each frequency band Band 3150Hz Band7 4000Hz Band8 8000Hz Simultaneously adjusts the width of Q HS e adjusted ranges for all the fre quency bonds Level 0 127 Output Level 03 ISOLATOR This is an equalizer which cuts the volume greatly allowing you to add a special effect to the sound by cutting the volume in varying ranges Parameter Value Description Boost Cut Low These boost and cut each of the High Boost Middle and Low frequency ranges 60 4 dB At 60 dB the sound becomes inaudi Cut Mid ble dB is equivalent to the input lev Boost el of the sound Cut High Turns the Anti Phase function on and off for the Low frequency ranges anh Phase Low OFF ON When turned on the counter channel w of stereo sound is inverted and added to the signal Adjusts the level settings for the Low fre quency ranges Anti Phase Low Adjusting this level for certain fre 0 127 Level quencies allows you to lend emphasis to specific parts This is effective only for stereo source Anti Phase Mid OFF ON Settings of the Anti Phase function for the Sw Middle frequency ranges Anti Phase Mid The parameters are the same as for Level 0 127 the Low frequency ranges Turns Low Booster on off Low Boost Sw OFF ON This emphasizes the bottom to create a heavy bass sound Increasing this value gives you a h
17. Adjusts the volume balance between the sound that is sent through the flanger W and the sound that is not sent through the flanger D Level 0 127 Output Level Rin R out Parameter Range Explanation Depth 0 127 Depth of the effect Depth to which the damper pedal is Damper 0 127 pressed controls the resonant sound Frequency of the filter that cuts the Pre LPF pe Hz high frequency content of the input sound BYPASS no cut Frequency of the filter that cuts the Pre HPF on 6 Hz ow frequency content of the input sound BYPASS no cut Frequency of the filter that boosts Peaking Freq 200 8000 Hz cuts a specific frequency region of the input sound Amount of boost cut produced by Peaking Gain 15 15 dB the filter at the specified frequency region of the input sound Width of the frequency region 0 5 1 0 2 0 4 0 boosted cut by the Peaking Gain Peaking Q 8 0 parameter larger values make the region narrower 16 15000 Hz Frequency at which the high fre HF Damp quency content of the resonant BYPASS sound will be cut BYPASS no cut Frequency at which the low frequen LF Damp H cy content of the resonant sound will 2 be cut BYPASS no cut This simulates the actual changes in lid 6 1 sound that occur when the lid of a g grand piano is set at different heights EQ Low Freq 200 400 Hz Frequency of the low range EQ EQ Low Gain
18. 01 REVERB Type of reverb delay ROOM short reverb with high density ROOMZ short reverb with low density peur oF Higher values will cut more of the high fre quencies Level 0 127 Output level of reverberation Time 0 127 Time length of reverberation Del Adjusts the amount of the delay sound that is Feed ak 0 127 fed back into the effect when the Reverb Char acter setting is 6 or 7 ioo STAGET reverb with greater late reverber Type dd HALLI STAGE2 reverb with strong early reflections d HALL1 very clear sounding reverb HAS DELAY HALL2 nieh reverb PANDELAY DELAY conventional delay effect delay effect with echoes that PAN DELAY delay eff h echoes th pan left and right Time length of reverberation Time 0 127 Type ROOMI HALL2 Delay time Type DELAY PAN DELAY Adjusts the frequency above which the high fre HFD 200 8000 Hz quency content of the reverb sound will be cut or amP BYPASS damped If you do not want to cut the high fre quencies set this parameter to BYPASS Adjusts the amount of delay feedback when Dela the Type setting is DELAY or PAN DELAY Feedback 0 127 Amount of delay sound returned to the input this setting is valid only if Type is DELAY or PAN DELAY 02 SRV ROOM 03 SRV HALL 04 SRV PLATE Pre Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until Delay 0 9 100 ims the reverb sound is hear
19. s A D S nis 15 PERFORM RPM lett Et ol cm Fa 11 36 PERFORM MIXER screen 24 SQ 13 36 LUSH 36 Name SU P Sia N TRA RIA 39 Parameters ku a 37 Piano setting asua to et p e TO HEU PORTO 19 Pitch Bend eene eset 36 Pitch Bend Range ssssss 39 Pitch Bend Modulation lever 10 36 Playback mode sss 33 Playing SMF Audio Files 3 osa S iN WR hats 30 SOllg actae ED 29 32 Playlist s sss 30 31 33 PLAYLIST SELECT screens entretenir 31 Portamento Switch sss 39 Portamento Time 39 Power On Off site rec RR E 15 POWER switch hrs 12 15 Preset memory ee re RD ORI ORE en 14 Punch 28 R Rai Mode tide ot DR 28 Recording p Eee EE e RES 26 Specili d Part tst p 27 Release Time tr ete ee eter aet 38 Repeat Al i inc et e at tds 33 Replac recording RR RR CERRAR 28 Rerecording 5e eter pete ree poteet 28 RESONANCE ia uu 38 REVERB fete re Dub eerte e u 40 Reverb Parameters sssssssssssseee 83 Reverb Send Level 38 Rhythm Setlist AE 92 Rx Channels s ee hae ee
20. 4 o o g x I N 5 A o YE C6 g a C7 103 94 1159 1160 1161 1162 1163 1164 StandardKit3 Rock Kit 1 Rock Kit 2 Brush Jz Kit Orch Kit 909 808 Kit HipHop Kick2 R amp B Kick MaxLow Kick2 TR909 1 Timpani Roll TR909 Kick 2 Syn Swt Atk1 Rk CmpKick MaxLow Kick1 TR909 Kickib ConcertBD 2 TR909 Kick 4 Lo Bit Stk 1 Sft Snr Gst LD Rim mf Jazz Snr R8 Shaker 1 Urbn Sn Roll TR707 Kick Dry Kick 4 Power Kick Reg Kick 1 Jngl pkt Snr TR909 Kick 5 TR808 Snr 5 Snr Roll Mix Clap 2 Soft Jz Roll Reverse Cym TR909 Snr 3 Vint Kick 1 SH32 Kick Vint Kick Reg Kick 2 Snr Roll TR909 Kick 3 Reg PHH Reg PHH Rock CHH2 Reg PHH Jazz Ride TR909 PHH 2 Vint Kick 2 Reg Kick 1 Rock Kick Jazz Kick 1 Timpani Roll TR909 Kick 6 Old Kick 1 Reg Kick 2 Rk CmpKick Jazz Kick 2 ConcertBD 1 TR909 Kick 1 Lo Bit Stk 4 Reg Stick Wild Stick Hard Stick Hard Stick TR909 Rim Reg Snr 1 Reg Snr2 Maple Snr Jazz Rim Amb Snr 2 TR909 Snr 1 Amb Clap Reg Snr Gst Sft Snr Gst Jz Brsh Swsh Gospel Clap TR909 Clap 1 TY Rim Reg Snr1 Reg Snr1 Jazz Snr C
21. x a o r a BB o N o g x I N A o YE g g a 103 1171 1172 1173 1174 1175 1176 House Kit Nu Technica Machine Kit2 ArtificalKit Noise Kit Kick Menu TR909 Kick 3 SH32 Kick 1 AnalogKick 5 TR909 Kick 2 TR909Kick2 e SH32 Kick JD EML 5th 1 AnalogKick6a AnalogKick 2 TR909Kick4 Urbn Sn Roll AnalogKick 6 Analog Snr 1 TR808 Snr 5 Urbn SnRoll1 TR909 Kick 2 TR909 Kick 5 AnalogKickia TR909 Kick 3 TR909 Kick 5 TR909 Snr 6 Plastic Kc3a TR808 Snr 4 Vint Snr 3 Door Creak 1 TR909 Kick 5 R amp B Kick FB Kick FB Kick TR909 Kick 1 TR909 PHH 2 TR707 Kick TR808 PHH TR606 Cym 2a SynSwt Atk7a TR909 Kick4a Plastic Kc3b AnalogKick6b AnalogKick 3 Cajon 3a Reg Kick p TR909 Kick4b SH32 Kick 2 AnalogKick6c TVF Trigger Cajon 3b Reg Kick f TR909 Rim TR909 Snr 5 R amp B ShrtRim2 TR909 Rim Laser Reg Kick ff TR909 Snr 4 Syn Mtl Atk2 TR909 Snr 1 TR909 Snr 1 Door Creak2a Rock Kick p TR909 Clap 2 Flange Snr TR707 Clap Claptail Train Pass Rock Kick f TR90
22. 15 Turning the power on sse 15 Turning the power off sss sese 15 Adjusting the Display Contrast LCD CONTRAST knob 16 Basic Operotion 16 Changing Value irit ines 16 Moving the cursor 16 Chandni Ma 5 2 o eth toot eee aes 16 Main Screen ze su d Id ode bo 16 Listening to the Demo Songs 17 Restoring the Prelude to Its Factory Settings 17 Preserving Certain Settings Even When You Switch Performances Lock System 17 Input settings for the EXT INPUT jack 18 Keyboard Mode Functions 19 Playing Sounds from the Keyboard Keyboard 19 Using Single 19 Using Piano Models nu e eon enge 19 Using Split Mode SPLIT 19 Changing the Split 19 Using Dual Mode DUAL 19 Selecting a Tone TONE 20 Using the VALUE dial s 20 Choosing from the Tone list sess 20 Switching to an Arabian Scale or Other Teniper mient c uestre tur Ee t rt 20 Changing the Key Touch KEY TOUCH 21 Shifting the Keyboard Pitch in Octave Steps OCTAVE Bulttons 21 Transposing Keyboard Sounds and
23. 45 mae Wrong Check the Master Tune setting Could the pitch have been changed by pedal operations or by pitch bend mes _ sages received from an external MIDI device Notes Are Cut Off If you attempt to play more than 128 voices simultaneously currently sounding m notes may be cut off Check the format of your USB memory B memory isnot detected The Prelude can use USB memory that has been formatted as FAT If your USB The files are not shown memory was formatted using any other method please re format it using FAT Check the following points Can t back up to USB memory Could the USB memory be write protected I s there sufficient free space on the USB memory This may be due to the following reasons Playlists may not be shown if you directly add delete modify the song data in the ROLAND folder without using Playlist Editor p 49 Playlists are not shown For some reason the USB memory is not recognized Itis possible that the USB memory was not formatted correctly The Prelude can use USB memory that has been formatted as FAT If your USB memory was formatted using any other method please re format it using FAT Are the songs placed in the root directory Songs may not be shown if you directly add delete modify the song data 49 in the ROLAND folder without using Playlist Editor d Songs are not shown i Itis possible that the USB memory was not formatted correctly The Prelude can use USB memory tha
24. Parameter Explanation If this is on the songs in the playlist will play Chain ivel Play consecutively Playback will stop when the last song has ended IF this is on when the last song in the playlist has ended the unit returns to the first song and enters Repeat d All pause mode If Chain Play is on consecutive playback will continue repeating Changing the song order 1 In the SONG SELECT screen 31 choose the CHANGE icon and then press ENTER The song order change window will appear 2 Turn the VALUE dial to specify the desired position of the currently selected song 3 When you ve specified the desired position press ENTER If you do not want to change the position press EXIT Deleting the song 1 In the SONG SELECT screen 31 choose the DELETE icon and then press ENTER A confirmation window will appear 2 Press ENTER Backing Track Functions If you do not want to delete press EXIT Adjusting the volume of each song 1 Inthe SONG SELECT screen 31 choose the S INFO icon and then press ENTER 2 Use V to select Level Edit and then press ENTER The SONG INFO LEVEL screen will appear NOTE This item is not shown for internal songs SONG 3 Use the cursor buttons to select a parameter 4 Turn the VALUE dial to adjust the value Parameter Value Explanation Assuming that the original volume the Level 12 0 volume o
25. SYSTEM MIDI Parameter Value Explanation MIDI Tx Switch SERO Upper Tx Channel 15 Lower Tx Channel ae MIDI Bx Refer to MIDI Parameters p 43 Switch OFF ON Upper Rx Channel 1515 Lower Rx Channel 75 Tx Tx Pitch Bend OFF ON ya OFF ON Modulation Program OFF ON Change Refer to MIDI Parameters p 43 Tx Clock OFF ON Tx Start Stop OFF ON Tx Song OFF ON Position Rx Rx Sync OFF ON Rx Pitch Bend OFF ON Rx OFF ON Refer to MIDI Parameters p 43 Modulation i Rx Program OFF ON Change SYSTEM METRONOME Parameter Value Explanation Metronome Switch OFF ON ALWAYS MM REC PLAY Refer to Using the Metronome p 22 LOW letronome MEDIUM Level HIGH SYSTEM LOCK Parameter Value Explanation Style OFF ON Tone OFF ON Refer to Preserving Certain Settings Even When You Switch im OER ON Performances Lock System 17 Transpose OFF ON Settings cannot be stored for the parameters marked by the table When the power is turned on these parameter will always return to the same value the default value UKU in System settings that are not stored In addition to the parameters marked by in the above table the following settings cannot be stored BALANCE button setting p 23 Recording setting p 28 Rec Mode Count In Punch In Out setting Input Quantize D Beam controller on off p 34 Ex
26. 40 Upper MFX Chorus Send 40 Upper MFX Reverb Send 40 Upper MFX SoUrce cete reed 41 Upper Ti eterne tete een roe 19 USB cd dre tte tete dete o puya Wa piya P ama poq 30 USB Driver Ede 44 45 USB IMPORT Renee ERE en RE dett 11 49 USB eee gerere Ree 48 USB Memory Format 48 USB MEMORY PLAYER 23 31 USB Memory 13 30 USB MEMORY PLAYER CONTROL ee 31 108 USB MIDI connector 12 44 User Date boe Dated cette eot dean ote 48 User memoty esa an tr re d ERR E apaku nha 13 User Style Adding ete 25 Deleting ena eee E ens 25 V VALUE ay hiya oct ta eene oS 1 VARIATION buttons 24 VA 24 ERU 21 Velocity Sensitivity rtr rer Pe 21 MEPSIOM rs te RED REUTERS 47 Vibrate Delay ette itte ein 38 Vibrato Depth te ete etae tette 38 Vibrato C apa S ve ds ted 38 WANA NANA KENA ite canna ES 11 50 WINKS 50 VINK SETUP A as sees ath em 50 Mie teat MA oe tI Ue ASI 34 Volume D
27. Dotted sixteenth note Eighth note J Quarter note triplet Dotted eighth note Quarter note dg Haltnote triplet Dotted quarter note Sixteenth note 2 Eighth note triplet J J Half note E Dotted half note Whole note triplet o Whole note Double note triplet e Dotted whole note Double note If you specify the delay time as a note value slowing down the tempo will not change the delay time beyond a certain length This is because there is an upper limit for the delay time if the delay time is specified as a note value and you slow down the tempo until this upper limit is reached the delay time cannot change any further This upper limit is the maximum value that can be specified when setting the delay time as a numerical value When Using 3D Effects The following 3D effects utilize RSS Roland Sound Space technology to create a spaciousness that cannot be produced by delay reverb chorus etc 52 3D DELAY 29 3D CHORUS 30 3D FLANGER 31 3D STEP FLANGER When using these effects we recommend that you place your speakers as follows Also make sure that the speakers are at a sufficient distance from the walls on either side If the left and right speakers are too far apart or if there is too much reverberation the full 3D effect may not appear Each of these effects has an Output Mode parameter If the sound from the OUTPUT j
28. Lin CO Direct Level Echo Level CO Tape Echo Echo Level R in R out Direct Level Parameter Value Description Combination of playback heads to use S M L 5 Select from three different heads with dif Mode S L M L h dalai S M L erent delay times S short M middle L long Tape speed Repeat Rate 0 127 Increasing this value will shorten the spac ing of the delayed sounds Intensity 0 127 Amount of delay repeats Bass 15 15 dB Boost cut for the lower range of the echo sound Treble 15 15 Boost cut for the upper range of the echo sound Head Pan Head M Pan 164 63R Independent panning for the short middle and long playback heads Head L Pan Amount of tape dependent distortion to be added This simulates the slight tonal changes Tape Distortion gt 079 that can be detected by signal analysis equipment Increasing this value will in crease the distortion Speed of wow flutter complex variation in Wow Elonen 0 127 pitch caused by tape wear and rotational ir ate regularity ME 0 127 Depth of wow flutter Echo Level 0 127 Volume of the echo sound Direct Level 0 127 Volume of the original sound Level 0 127 Output level EE LOFI NOISE In oddition to o lo fi effect this adds vorious types of noise such os white noise and disc noise Lin Rin Parameter Value Description LoFi Type 1 9 Degrades the
29. 4 Press ENTER 28 A confirmation window will appear 5 Press ENTER to save the Song If you press EXIT you re returned to the previous screen without the Song being saved Loading Song Data from USB Memory Song data saved on USB memory can be loaded into the Prelude SMF data also can be stored into the user Song For details refer to Loading User Data Saved on USB Memory Import p 48 Deleting a Song Here s how you can delete the specified Song or all Songs from User Song memory 1 Press MENU Use V 110 select Utility then press ENTER P Use the cursor buttons to select Song or All Songs then press ENTER 5 If you selected Song in step 4 use the VALUE dial or Al V 110 select the Song that you want to delete then press ENTER A confirmation window will appear 6 Press ENTER to delete the Song s If you press EXIT you re returned to the previous screen without deleting the Song s Selecting and Playing a Song SONG 1 Import on or several songs from a USB memory if you haven t already done so 2 Press SONG so the button is lit 3 Turn the VALUE dial to select a Song When the cursor is at the Song number you can also select a Song from the Song list Press ENTER to access the Song list using Y to select a Song and then pressing ENTER You can use NUMERIC to select a Song 16 4 Press B
30. 1185 GM2 STANDARD 1186 GM2 ROOM 1187 GM2 POWER 1188 GM2 ELECTRIC 1189 GM2 ANALOG 1190 GM2 JAZZ 1191 GM2 BRUSH 1192 GM2 ORCHSTRA 1193 GM2 SFX Preset Group Note No 1153 1154 1155 1156 1157 1158 GW Std Kit WD Std Kit LD Std Kit TY Std Kit StandardKit1 StandardKit2 28 Dance Kick Dance Kick Dance Kick Dance Kick MaxLow Kick2 Dance Kick 29 Dry Kick 1 Dry Kick 1 Dry Kick 1 Dry Kick 1 Rk CmpKick Dry Kick 1 30 Snr Roll Snr Roll Snr Roll Snr Roll Gospel Clap Snr Roll 31 Power Kick Power Kick Power Kick Power Kick Sweep Bass Power Kick EM aAmb snr2 Amb Snr 2 Amb Snr 2 Amb Snr2 p Sft Snr Gst Amb Snr 2p 33 Power Kick Reg Kick 2 Reg Kick 2 Power Kick HipHop Kick2 Power Kick ES Reg PHH Reg PHH Reg PHH Reg PHH Reg PHH Reg PHH 35 Reg Kick Reg Kick 1 Reg Kick 1 Reg Kick Reg Kick 1 Reg Kick 1 C2136 SF Kick 1 WD Kick LD Kick TY Kick Reg Kick 2 Reg Kick 2 EAM SF CStk WD CStk LD CStk TY CStk Reg Stick Wild Stick 38 SF Snr WD Snr LD Snr TY Snr Reg Snr 2 Amb Snr 1 EE SF Snr Gst SF Snr Gst Reg Snr Gst SF SnrGst Reg Snr Gst Reg Snr Gst 40 SF Rim WD Rim LD Rim TY Rim Reg Snr 1 Amb Snr 2 41 RR F Tom RR F Tom RR F Tom RR F Tom Reg F Tom Reg F Tom E Reg CHH 1 Reg CHH 1 Reg CHH 1 Reg CHH 1 Reg CHH 1 Reg CHH 1 43 SF L Tom TY L Tom
31. 504 553 2029 MARTINIQUE Musique amp Son 27 1 1 Mangle 97232 Le Lamantin Martinique F W I TEL 596 596 426860 Gigamusic SARL 10 Rte De La Folie 97200 Fort De France Martinique F W I TEL 596 596 715222 MEXICO Casa Veerkamp s a de c v Av Toluca No 323 Col Olivar de los Padres 01780 Mexico D F MEXICO TEL 55 5668 6699 NICARAGUA Bansbach Instrumentos Musicales Nicaragua Altamira D Este Calle Principal de la Farmacia 5ta Avenida 1 Cuadra al Lago 503 Managua Nicaragua TEL 505 277 2557 PANAMA SUPRO MUNDIAL S A Boulevard Andrews Albrook Panama City REP DE PANAMA TEL 315 0101 PARAGUAY Distribuidora De Instrumentos Musicales J E Olear y ESQ Manduvira Asuncion PARAGUAY TEL 595 21 492147 PERU Audionet Distribuciones Musicales SAC Juan Fanning 530 Miraflores Lima Peru TEL 511 4461388 TRINIDAD AMR Ltd Ground Floor Maritime Plaza Barataria Trinidad W I TEL 868 638 6385 URUGUAY Todo Musica S A Francisco Acuna de Figueroa 177 C P 11 800 Montevideo URUGUAY TEL 02 924 2335 VENEZUELA Instrumentos Musicales Allegro C A Av las industrias edf Guitar import 37 zona Industrial de Turumo Caracas Venezuela TEL 212 244 1122 AUSTRIA Roland Elektronische Musikinstrumente HmbH Austrian Office Eduard Bodem Gasse 8 A 6020 Innsbruck AUSTRIA TEL 0512 26 44 260 BELGIUM FRANCE HOLLAND LUXEMBOURG Roland Central Europe N V
32. 66 95 352 Dance Steam HIT amp STAB 87 66 96 353 Good Old Day WIND 87 66 97 354 SC WindWood WIND 87 66 98 355 Clarence net WIND 87 66 99 356 SC Oboe WIND 87 66 00 357 Hall Oboe WIND 87 66 01 358 English Horn WIND 87 66 02 359 Bassoon WIND 87 66 03 360 SC Flute FLUTE 87 66 04 361 Piccolo FLUTE 87 66 05 362 Andes Mood FLUTE 87 66 06 363 HimalayaPipe FLUTE 87 66 07 364 Solo Tp AC BRASS 87 66 08 365 Horn Chops AC BRASS 87 66 09 366 Flugel Horn AC BRASS 87 66 10 367 SpitFlugel AC BRASS 87 66 11 368 Mute Tp Mod AC BRASS 87 66 12 369 Harmon Mute AC BRASS 87 66 13 370 Soft Tb AC BRASS 87 66 14 371 Solo Tb AC BRASS 87 66 15 372 Solo Bone AC BRASS 87 66 16 373 XP Horn AC BRASS 87 66 374 Grande Tuba 55 87 66 18 375 SC Tuba AC BRASS 87 66 19 376 StackTp Sect AC BRASS 87 66 20 377 Section AC BRASS 87 66 21 378 TpTb Sect AC BRASS 87 66 22 379 SC Brt Brass AC BRASS 87 66 23 380 SC BrsSect 1 AC BRASS 87 66 24 381 SC BrsSect 2 AC BRASS 87 66 25 86 No Name Category MSB LSB PC 382 Tpts amp Tmbs AC BRASS 87 66 126 383 Brass amp Sax AC BRASS 87 66 127 384 BrassPartOut AC BRASS 87 66 128 385 Simple Tutti AC BRASS 87 67 1 386 F Horns Sect AC BRASS 87 67 2 387 Full sForza AC BRASS 87 67 3 388 Stereo Brass AC BRASS 87 67 4 389 Wide SynBrss SYNTH BRASS 87
33. CENTRAL LATIN AMERICA ARGENTINA Instrumentos Musicales S A Av Santa Fe 2055 1123 Buenos Aires ARGENTINA TEL 011 4508 2700 BARBADOS A amp B Music Supplies LTD 12 Webster Industrial Park Wildey St Michael Barbados TEL 246 430 1100 BRAZIL Roland Brasil Ltda Rua San Jose 211 Parque Industrial San Jose Cotia Sao Paulo SP BRAZIL TEL 011 4615 5666 CHILE Comercial Fancy II S A Rut 96 919 420 1 Nataniel Cox 739 4th Floor Santiago Centro CHILE TEL 02 688 9540 COLOMBIA Centro Musical Ltda Cra 43 B No 25 A 41 Bododega 9 Medellin Colombia TEL 574 3812529 COSTA RICA JUAN Bansbach Instrumentos Musicales Ave 1 Calle 11 Apartado 10237 San Jose COSTA RICA TEL 258 0211 CURACAO Zeelandia Music Center Inc Orionweg 30 Curacao Netherland Antilles TEL 305 5926866 DOMINICAN REPUBLIC Instrumentos Fernando Giraldez Calle Proyecto Central No 3 Ens La Esperilla Santo Domingo Dominican Republic TEL 809 683 0305 ECUADOR Mas Musika Rumichaca 822 y Zaruma Guayaquil Ecuador TEL 593 4 2302364 EL SALVADOR OMNI MUSIC 75 Avenida Norte y Final Alameda Juan Pablo II Edificio No 4010 San Salvador EL SALVADOR TEL 262 0788 GUATEMALA Casa Instrumental Calzada Roosevelt 34 01 zona 11 Ciudad de Guatemala Guatemala TEL 502 599 2888 HONDURAS Almacen Pajaro Azul S A de C V BO Paz Barahona 3 Ave 11 Calle S O San Pedro Sula Honduras TEL
34. Rivera Digitec India Pvt Ltd 411 Nirman Kendra Mahalaxmi Flats Compound Off Dr Edwin Moses Road Mumbai 400011 INDIA TEL 022 2493 9051 INDONESIA PT Citra IntiRama Jl Cideng Timur No 15 150 Jakarta Pusat INDONESIA TEL 021 6324170 KOREA Cosmos Corporation 1461 9 Seocho Dong Seocho Ku Seoul KOREA TEL 02 3486 8855 MALAYSIA Roland Asia Pacific Sdn Bhd 45 1 Block C2 Jalan PJU 1 39 Dataran Prima 47301 Petaling Jaya Selangor MALAYSIA TEL 03 7805 3263 VIET NAM VIET THUONG CORPORATION 386 CACH MANG THANG TAM ST DIST 3 HO CHI MINH CITY VIET NAM TEL 9316540 When you need repair service call your nearest Roland Service Center or authorized Roland distributor in your country as shown below PHILIPPINES G A Yupangco amp Co Inc 339 Gil J Puyat Avenue Makati Metro Manila 1200 PHILIPPINES TEL 02 899 9801 SINGAPORE SWEE LEE MUSIC COMPANY PTE LTD 150 Sims Drive SINGAPORE 387381 TEL 6846 3676 TAIWAN ROLAND TAIWAN ENTERPRISE CO LTD Room 5 9fl No 112 Chung Shan N Road Sec 2 Taipei TAIWAN R O C TEL 02 2561 3339 THAILAND Theera Music Co Ltd 100 108 Soi Verng Nakornkasem New Road Sumpantawongse Bangkok 10100 THAILAND TEL 02 224 8821 AUSTRALIA NEW ZEALAND Roland Corporation Australia Pty Ltd 38 Campbell Avenue Dee Why West NSW 2099 AUSTRALIA For Australia Tel 02 9982 8266 For New Zealand Tel 09 3098 715
35. 061 Chiffer Lead SOFT LEAD 2 0 84 062 Charang HARD LEAD 2 0 85 063 Wire Lead HARD LEAD 2 1 064 Solo Vox SOFT LEAD 2 0 86 065 5 Saw Wave HARD LEAD 2 0 87 066 Bass amp Lead HARD LEAD 2 0 88 067 Delayed Lead HARD LEAD 2 1 068 Fantasia OTHER SYNTH 2 0 89 069 Warm Pad SOFT PAD 2 0 90 070 Sine Pad SOFT PAD 2 1 071 Polysynth OTHER SYNTH 2 0 91 072 Space Voice VOX 2 0 92 073 ltopia VOX 2 1 074 Bowed Glass SOFT PAD 2 0 93 90 No Name Category MSB LSB PC 152 Explosion SOUND FX 121 3 153 GW Std Kit RHYTHM 86 64 1 154 WD Std Kit RHYTHM 86 64 2 155 LD Std Kit RHYTHM 86 64 3 156 TY Std Kit RHYTHM 86 64 4 157 StandardKitl RHYTHM 86 64 5 158 StandardKit2 RHYTHM 86 64 6 159 StandardKit3 RHYTHM 86 64 7 160 Rock Kit 1 RHYTHM 86 64 8 161 Rock Kit 2 RHYTHM 86 64 9 162 Brush Jz Kit RHYTHM 86 64 0 163 Orch Kit RHYTHM 86 64 1 164 909 808 Kit RHYTHM 86 64 2 165 Limiter Kit RHYTHM 86 64 3 166 HipHop Kit 1 RHYTHM 86 64 4 167 R amp B Kit RHYTHM 86 64 5 168 HiFi R amp B Kit RHYTHM 86 64 6 169 Machine Kit RHYTHM 86 64 7 170 KitEuro P
36. 45 Prelude The volume level of the instrument Could you be using a connection cable that contains a resistor Use a connec connected to EXT INPUT is too low tion cable that does not contain a resistor The reverb and chorus effects for the keyboard parts won t be applied if their amounts are set to p 40 Check the Effect Send settings Effects Are Not Applied MFX will apply only to the realtime performance of the part you play by hand the Upper Part or Lower Part Be aware that MFX will not apply to recorded song data Some combinations of Tones and effects may sound different in comparison to The Effect Sounds Wrong other Tones p 40 Check the Effect Source settings Pitch Bend Not Obtained When Could the Pitch Bend Range be set to 0 p 39 Pitch Bend Lever Is Moved Set the Pitch Bend Range to a value other than O For some effect or Part volume settings the sound may distort Adjust the follow ing parameters p 24 Volume parameters in the PERFORM MIXER screen p 40 Sound Is Distorted Amount of reverb or chorus for the Effect Send settings p 23 Overall volume and volume balance Could you be applying an effect such as overdrive or distortion which intention p 40 ally distorts the sound 53 Appendices Problem Check Solution Page For some Tones the pitch in certain ranges may sound different than other _ Tones Could the tuning of the Prelude be incorrect Pitch
37. 55 130 SuperDistld2 ORGAN 87 65 2 56 Remember ELPIANO 87 64 56 131 FullDraw Org ORGAN 87 65 3 57 Vibe EP ELPIANO 87 64 57 132 StakDraw Org ORGAN 87 65 4 58 EE PIANO 975 64a es 133 FullStop Org ORGAN 87 65 5 59 SC Pure Wuly ELPIANO 87 64 59 134 SC Perc Org ORGAN 87 65 6 80 SC Trem Woly ELPIANO PETHE 135 VKHold4Speed ORGAN 87 65 7 61 Super Wurly ELPIANO 87 64 el 136 X Perc Organ ORGAN 87 65 8 62 Wurly Trem ELPIANO 87 64 62 137 Rocky Organ ORGAN 87 65 9 63 VelSpdWurly ELPIANO 87 64 63 138 Euro Organ ORGAN 87 65 0 64 Fonky Fonky ELPIANO 87 64 64 139 Rhythm n B ORGAN 87 65 1 65 FM EP mix ELPIANO 87 64 65 140 Phono Organ ORGAN 87 65 2 66 FM 777 EL PIANO 87 64 66 141 LoFi PercOrg ORGAN 87 65 3 67 FM EPad EL PIANO 87 64 67 142 Rochno Org ORGAN 87 65 4 68 EP Stack ELPIANO 87 64 68 143 R amp B Organ 1 ORGAN 87 65 5 69 EP Belle ELPIANO 87 64 69 144 R amp B Organ 2 ORGAN 87 65 6 70 80s EP ELPIANO 87 e4 70 145 SC Dist Bee ORGAN 87 65 7 71 SAEPiano ELPIANO 87 64 71 146 60 s Org 1 ORGAN 87 65 8 72 BrillClav DB KEYBOARDS 87 64 72 147 60 s Org 2 ORGAN 87 65 9 73 Cell Clav KEYBOARDS 87 64 73 148 Smoky Organ ORGAN 87 65 20 74 VnigClav KEYBOARDS 87 64 74 149 SCSoapOpera ORGAN 87 65 21 75 Cutter Clavi KEYBOARDS 87 64 75 150 Crummy Organ ORGAN 87 65 22 A
38. 67 5 390 DetuneSawBrs SYNTH BRASS 87 67 6 391 J Pop Brass SYNTH BRASS 87 67 7 392 80s Brass 1 SYNTH BRASS 87 67 8 393 80s Brass 2 SYNTH BRASS 87 67 9 394 Ana Brass SYNTH BRASS 87 67 0 395 Soft Brass SYNTH BRASS 87 67 1 396 JP8000 Brass SYNTH BRASS 87 67 2 397 Sonic Brass SYNTH BRASS 87 67 3 398 Syn Brass SYNTH BRASS 87 67 4 399 Syn Brass 2 SYNTH BRASS 87 67 5 400 Xpand Brass SYNTH BRASS 87 67 6 401 Xpand Brass2 SYNTH BRASS 87 67 7 402 Super Saw SYNTH BRASS 87 67 8 403 SoftSynBrass SYNTH BRASS 87 67 9 404 Silky JP SYNTH BRASS 87 67 20 405 Silk Brs Pad SYNTH BRASS 87 67 21 406 80s Brass 3 SYNTH BRASS 87 67 22 407 X Saw Brass SYNTH BRASS 87 67 23 408 Cheesy Brass SYNTH BRASS 87 67 24 409 Dual Saw Brs SYNTH BRASS 87 67 25 410 Juno 106 Brs SYNTH BRASS 87 67 26 411 Poly Brass SYNTH BRASS 87 67 27 412 Stacked Brs SYNTH BRASS 87 67 28 413 Soprano Sax SAX 87 67 29 414 Solo Sop Sax SAX 87 67 30 415 Alto mp SAX 87 67 31 416 Alto Sax SAX 87 67 32 417 Solo AltoSax SAX 87 67 33 418 Altolead Sax SAX 87 67 34 419 XP TnrBrethy SAX 87 67 35 420 Tenor Sax SAX 87 67 36 42 Fat TenorSax SAX 87 67 37 422 Baritone Sax SAX 87 67 38 423 Sax Sect 1 SAX 87 67 39 424 Sax Sect 2 SAX 87 67 40 425 Horny Sax SAX 87 67 Al 426 FXM Alto Sax SAX 87 67 42 427 Porta Solold HARD LEAD
39. ReverseSweep BRIGHT PAD 87 69 125 689 Frgile Saws OTHER SYNTH 87 69 49 766 HugeSoundMod BRIGHT PAD 87 69 126 88 No Name Category MSB 15 PC 767 Metal Swell BRIGHT PAD 87 69 127 768 NuSoundtrack BRIGHT PAD 87 69 128 769 Phat Strings BRIGHT PAD 87 70 1 770 Soft OB Pad SOFT PAD 87 70 2 771 SC Hollow SOFT PAD 87 70 3 772 SC Sqr Pad SOFT PAD 87 70 4 773 Silk Pad SOFT PAD 87 70 5 774 WarmReso Pad SOFT PAD 87 70 6 775 SC Soft Pad SOFT PAD 87 70 7 776 Air Pad SOFT PAD 87 70 8 777 Soft Breeze SOFT PAD 87 70 9 778 JP Strings 1 SOFT PAD 87 70 10 779 JP Strings 2 SOFT PAD 87 70 11 780 DelayStrings SOFT PAD 87 70 12 781 NorthStrings SOFT PAD 87 70 13 782 SC Syn Str SOFT PAD 87 70 14 783 Slow Saw Str SOFT PAD 87 70 15 784 Syn Strings SOFT PAD 87 70 16 785 OB Slow Str SOFT PA
40. be lost when the unit is sent for repairs Important data should always be backed up a USB memory or written down on paper when possible During repairs due care is taken to avoid the loss of data However in certain cases such as when circuitry related to memory itself is out of order we regret that it may not be possible to restore the data and Roland assumes no liability concerning such loss of data Memory Backup Additional Precautions Please be aware that the contents of memory can be irretrievably lost as a result of a malfunction or the improper operation of the unit To protect yourself against the risk of loosing important data we recommend that you periodically save a backup copy of important data you have stored in the unit s memory to a USB memory Unfortunately it may be impossible to restore the contents of data that was stored in the Prelude s internal memory or on USB memory once it has been lost Roland Europe assumes no liability concerning such loss of data Use a reasonable amount of care when using the unit s buttons sliders or other controls and when using its jacks and connectors Rough handling can lead to malfunctions Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display When connecting disconnecting all cables grasp the connector itself never pull on the cable This way you will avoid causing shorts or damage to the cable s internal elements To avoid disturbing your neighbors try to
41. shorten it Decay Time 64 63 Adjusts the decay time the time from when the attack has finished until the volume reaches the level at which it will remain as long as you hold down the key Higher settings produce a longer decay time Adjusts the panning left right 164 0 stereo position of the Tone Release Time 64 63 Adjusts the release time the time from when you release a key until the sound disappears Turn the knob toward the right to lengthen the release time or toward the left to shorten it Vibrato Rate 64 63 Adjusts the modulation speed of vibrato Higher settings produce faster vibrato Pan 63R Values beginning with L place the sound at the left O at the center and at the right Chorus adds depth and Chorus 0 127 spaciousness to the sound This Send Level adjusts the level of the signal sent to Chorus Vibrato Depth 64 63 Adjusts the modulation depth vibrato Higher settings produce more intense vibrato Reverb adds the reverberation Reverb 0 127 characteristics of halls or Send Level auditoriums This adjusts the level of the signal sent to Reverb Vibrato Delay 64 63 Adjusts the time until vibrato begins Higher settings produce a longer delay until vibrato will begin This specifies the cutoff frequency at which the filter will begin affecting the spectral Cutoff 64 63 components of the sound Tur
42. then press ENTER A confirmation window will appear 6 Press ENTER If you press EXIT twice instead of ENTER the Song Initialize window will close without initializing a Song The SONG TRACK screen will appear 7 Use the cursor buttons to select an item and turn the VALUE dial to set the value Item Explanation Value Part Part to record 1 16 Tone The Tone number for each Part Mute Mute On no sound or Off sound setting for each Part Solo Solo On hear only this part or Off setting for each Part NOTE Be sure to select the sounds you want to use for your recording at this stage You cannot assign different sounds to previously recorded parts 8 Press SONG REC SONG REC will blink The Song Rec Standby screen will appear If you are recording a new Song there s no need to make settings in this screen Proceed to the next step 9 Press B gt II to start recording 10 Perform 11 Press B gt l to stop recording 27 Backing Track Functions Re recording Your Performance In the SONG TRACK screen you can overdub additional material onto your recorded performance or re record the specified measures of a performance You can use the following ways of re recording Replace New material is recorded as previously recorded material is erased Mix New notes are recorded on top of notes previously recorded Punch In Out Replace or Mix recording is p
43. 1 Amadeus KEYBOARDS 87 1 06 3 289 15 Rokkin pF AC PIANO 87 64 15 90 SC Celesta KEYBOARDS 87 64 90 16 Dark Grand AC PIANO 87 1647 16 91 Himalaya Ice BELI 87 64 91 17 SCGrand Pad AC PIANO 87 64 17 92 Syn Bell BEL 87 64 92 18 Warm Pad Pno AC PIANO 87 64 18 93 D 50 Fantsia BEL 87 64 93 19 SCGrand Vox AC PIANO 87 64 19 94 Wine Glass BEL 87 64 94 20 Cicada Piano AC PIANO 87 64 20 95 MuBox Pad BEL 87 64 95 21 XPiano Str AC PIANO 87 64 21 96 SC Bell 1 BEL 87 64 96 22 Warm Str Pno AC PIANO 87 64 22 97 FM Heaven BEL 87 64 97 23 Grand Hall AC PIANO 87 64 23 98 SC Glocken BEL 87 64 98 24 Rapsody AC PIANO 87 64 24 99 Music Bells BEL 87 64 99 25 JD 800 Piano AC PIANO 87 64 25 100 SC Musicbox BEL 87 64 100 26 SADancePno AC PIANO 87 64 26 101 Music Box 2 BEL 87 64 101 27 SC EGrand AC PIANO 87 64 27 102 Kalimbells BELI 87 64 102 28 Back E Grand AC PIANO 87 64 28 103 Step Ice BELI 87 64 103 29 SCGrand FM AC PIANO 87 64 29 104 SC Bell 2 BEL 87 64 104 30 SC Blend Pno AC PIANO 87 64 30 105 Candy Bell BEL 87 64 105 31 Piano Oz AC PIANO 87 64 31 106 SC Chime BEL 87 64 106 32 FXPiano AC PIANO 87 64 32 107 Bell Ring BEL 87 64 107 33 AmbientPiano AC PIANO 87 64 33 108 Tubular Bell BELI 87 64 108 34 SC Pure EP ELPIANO 87 64 34 109 5th Key BEL 87 64 109 35 SC
44. 15 dB Gain of the high range Volume balance between the di Balance D100 0W DO 100W rect sound D and the flanger sound W Level 0 127 Output Level HEXA CHORUS Uses a six phase chorus six layers of chorused sound to give richness and spatial spread to the sound Lin CO Balance D J b Rin R out Balance D Parameter Value Description Adjusts the delay time from the di Pre Delay 0 0 100 0 ms rect sound until the chorus sound is heard Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz note Frequency of modulation Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation Pre Delay 0 20 Adjusts the differences in Pre Delay Deviation p between each chorus sound Depth 20 420 Adjusts the difference in modulation Deviation bo depth between each chorus sound Adjusts the difference in stereo loca tion between each chorus sound 0 All chorus sounds will be in the Pan Deviation 0 20 center 20 Each chorus sound will be spaced at 60 degree intervals relative to the center Balance D100 0W DO 100W Volume balance between the direct sound D and the chorus sound W Rin R out Balance D Parameter Value Description Type of filter OFF no filter is used N LPF cuts the frequency ronge Filter Type EF TPE HPF above the Cutoff Freq HPF cuts the frequency range below the Cutoff Freq Cutoff Freq 200 8000 Hz Basic frequency of the filter Level 0 127 Output Level 65 TREMO
45. 21 201 Ultimo Bass BASS 87 65 73 278 SC Acid Bs SYNTH BASS 87 66 22 202 Roomy Bass BASS 87 65 74 279 Lo Fi TB SYNTH BASS 87 66 23 203 FingerMaster BASS 87 65 75 280 Drop Bass SYNTH BASS 87 66 24 204 All Round Bs BASS 87 65 76 281 Big Mini SYNTH BASS 87 66 25 205 R amp B Bs Slide BASS 87 65 77 282 Muffled MG SYNTH BASS 87 66 26 206 Sonic Pck Bs BASS 87 65 78 283 Intrusive Bs SYNTH BASS 87 66 27 207 Thumb Up BASS 87 65 79 284 Alpha SynBs SYNTH BASS 87 66 28 208 Tubby Mute BASS 87 65 80 285 ransistorBs SYNTH BASS 87 66 29 209 Chicken Bass BASS 87 65 81 286 Juno 60 Bass SYNTH BASS 87 66 30 210 Snug Bass BASS 87 65 82 287 Storm Bass SYNTH BASS 87 66 31 211 Return2Base BASS 87 65 83 288 Alpha ResoBs SYNTH BASS 87 66 32 212 Chorus Bass BASS 87 65 84 289 SH 101 Vibe SYNTH BASS 87 66 33 213 A Big Pick BASS 87 65 85 290 Fazee Bass SYNTH BASS 87 66 34 214 Basement BASS 87 65 86 291 Hi Energy Bs SYNTH BASS 87 66 35 215 SCFretnot 1 BASS 87 65 87 292 SC Violin STRINGS 87 66 36 216 SC Fretnot 2 BASS 87 65 88 293 Violin STRINGS 87 66 37 217 RichFretless BASS 87 65 89 294 Viola STRINGS 87 66 38 218 NewAge Frtls BASS 87 65 90 295 SC Cello STRINGS 87 66 39 219 SlapBass1 BASS 87 65 91 296 Cello STRINGS 87 66 40 220 Slap2 w Fx BASS 87 65 92 297 Contrabass STRINGS 87 66 41 221 Got Pop BASS 87 6
46. 68 83 596 Pad Pulses PULSATING 87 68 84 597 SeqPad 2 PULSATING 87 68 85 598 DSP Chaos PULSATING 87 68 86 599 Dancefloor PULSATING 87 68 87 600 Minor Thirds PULSATING 87 68 88 601 FX World PULSATING 87 68 89 602 Mr Fourier PULSATING 87 68 90 603 Nu Trance X PULSATING 87 68 91 604 Auto 5thSaws PULSATING 87 68 92 605 Cross Talk PULSATING 87 68 93 606 Reanimation PULSATING 87 68 94 607 VoX Chopper PULSATING 87 68 95 608 Trevor s Pad PULSATING 87 68 96 609 Fantomas Pad PULSATING 87 68 97 610 Jazzy Arps PULSATING 87 68 98 611 Keep Running PULSATING 87 68 99 612 Step In PULSATING 87 68 100 87 No Name Category MSB LSB PC No Name Category MSB LSB PC 613 Echo Echo PULSATING 87 68 01 690 Steamed Sawz OTHER SYNTH 87 69 50 614 Keep going PULSATING 87 68 02 691 RAVtune OTHER SYNTH 87 69 51 615 Arposphere PULSATING 87 68 03 692 Bu
47. 87 67 43 428 Porta Lead HARD LEAD 87 67 44 429 Wind Syn Ld HARD LEAD 87 67 45 430 SC Saw Ld 1 HARD LEAD 87 67 46 431 SC Saw Ld 2 HARD LEAD 87 67 47 432 Juno Lead HARD LEAD 87 67 48 433 Follow HARD LEAD 87 67 49 434 DC Triangle HARD LEAD 87 67 50 435 Sqr Seqence HARD LEAD 87 67 51 436 Pure Square HARD LEAD 87 67 52 437 Griggley HARD LEAD 87 67 53 438 SC LegatoSaw HARD LEAD 87 67 54 439 Lone Prophat HARD LEAD 87 67 55 440 Dual Profs HARD LEAD 87 67 56 441 Gwyo Press HARD LEAD 87 67 57 442 Q DualSaws HARD LEAD 87 67 58 443 Mogulator Ld HARD LEAD 87 67 59 444 DirtyVoltage HARD LEAD 87 67 60 445 Clean HARD LEAD 87 67 61 446 Distortion HARD LEAD 87 67 62 447 SC Syn ld HARD LEAD 87 67 63 448 Synlead 0322 HARD LEAD 87 67 64 449 X Sink Delay HARD LEAD 87 67 65 450 Destroyed 14 HARD LEAD 87 67 66 451 Synchro Lead HARD LEAD 87 67 67 452 Sync Ld Mono HARD LEAD 87 67 68 453 SyncModulate HARD LEAD 87 67 69 454 Distorted MG HARD LEAD 87 67 70 455 SonicVampire HARD LEAD 87 67 71 45 Blue Meanie HARD LEAD 87 67 72 457 SC Dist Lead HARD LEAD 87 67 73 458 Ringmod Lead HARD LEAD 87 67 74
48. Dig n Duke SOFT LEAD 87 67 01 486 SC Softlead SOFT LEAD 87 67 02 487 Mid Saw ld SOFT LEAD 87 67 03 488 X Pulse Lead SOFT LEAD 87 67 04 489 Mild 2 Sawld SOFT LEAD 87 67 05 490 Mew Lead SOFT LEAD 87 67 06 491 Shy Soloist SOFT LEAD 87 67 07 492 Theramax SOFT LEAD 87 67 08 493 Therasqu SOFT LEAD 87 67 09 494 GR lead SOFT LEAD 87 67 10 495 SH 2 Lead SOFT LEAD 87 67 11 496 SC Resolead SOFT LEAD 87 67 12 497 Modulated Ld SOFT LEAD 87 67 13 498 Synthi Fizz SOFT LEAD 87 67 14 499 Waspy Lead SOFT LEAD 87 67 15 500 Pulstar Ld SOFT LEAD 87 67 16 501 Naked Lead SOFT LEAD 87 67 17 502 Alpha Spit SOFT LEAD 87 67 18 503 Vliolin Lead SOFT LEAD 87 67 19 504 Mod Lead SOFT LEAD 87 67 20 505 JP Saw Lead SOFT LEAD 87 67 21 506 Tristar SOFT LEAD 87 67 22 507 Chubby Lead SOFT LEAD 87 67 23 508 Sneaky Leady SOFT LEAD 87 67 24 509 Shaku Lead SOFT LEAD 87 67 25 510 Legato Tkno SOFT LEAD 87 67 26 511 SCResoSaw ld SOFT LEAD 87 67 27 512 SliCed Lead SOFT LEAD 87 67 28 513 Mini Growl SOFT LEAD 87 68 1 514 Evangelized SOFT LEAD 87 68 2 515 Air Lead SOFT LEAD 87 68 3 516 Juno D Maj7 ECHNO SYNTH 87 68 4 517 Sweet House ECHNO SYNTH 87 68 5 518 Periscope ECHNO SYNTH 87 68 6 519 5th Voice ECHNO SYNTH 87 68 7 520 HPF Sweep ECHNO SYNTH 87 68 8 521 BPF Saw ECHNO SYNTH 87 68 9 522 Moon Synth ECHNO SYNTH 87 68 10 523 Del
49. Houtstraat 3 B 2260 Oevel Westerlo BELGIUM TEL 014 575811 CROATIA ART CENTAR Degenova 3 HR 10000 Zagreb TEL 1 466 8493 CZECH REP CZECH REPUBLIC DISTRIBUTOR s r o Voct rova 247 16 CZ 180 00 PRAHA 8 CZECH REP TEL 2 830 20270 DENMARK Roland Scandinavia A S Nordhavnsvej 7 Postbox 880 DK 2100 Copenhagen DENMARK TEL 3916 6200 FINLAND Roland Scandinavia As Filial Finland Elannontie 5 FIN 01510 Vantaa FINLAND TEL 0 9 68 24 020 GERMANY Roland Elektronische Musikinstrumente HmbH Oststrasse 96 22844 Norderstedt GERMANY TEL 040 52 60090 GREECE CYPRUS STOLLAS S A Music Sound Light 155 New National Road Patras 26442 GREECE TEL 2610 435400 HUNGARY Roland East Europe Ltd Warehouse Area DEPO Pf 83 H 2046 Torokbalint HUNGARY TEL 23 511011 IRELAND Roland Ireland G2 Calmount Park Calmount Avenue Dublin 12 Republic of IRELAND TEL 01 4294444 ITALY Roland Italy S p A Viale delle Industrie 8 20020 Arese Milano ITALY TEL 02 937 78300 NORWAY Roland Scandinavia Avd Kontor Norge Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 95 Lilleaker N 0216 Oslo NORWAY TEL 2273 0074 POLAND ROLAND POLSKA SP Z O O ul Kty Grodziskie 16B 03 289 Warszawa POLAND TEL 022 678 9512 PORTUGAL Roland Iberia S L Portugal Office Cais das Pedras 8 9 1 Dto 4050 465 Porto PORTUGAL TEL 22 608 00 60 ROMANIA FBS LINES Piata Libertatii 1 535500 Gh
50. L Tom ff Jazz Ride p MC500 Beep 1 LD Snr p Flange Snr Lite CHH LD M Tom mf Jazz Ride mf MC500 Beep 2 LD Snr mf Analog Snr 2 CR78 CHH LD M Tom f China Cymbal DR202 Beep LD Snr f Analog Snr 3 Dance CHH LD M Tom ff TR909 Crash JD Switch LD Snr ff TR909 Snr 1 Lo Bit PHH LD H Tom mf TR909 Ride Cutting Nz LD Rim mf TR909 Snr 2 Hip PHH LD H Tom f Concert Cym1 Vinyl Noise LD Rim f TR909 Snr 3 TR909 PHH 1 LD H Tom ff Concert Cym2 Applause LD Rim ff TR909 Snr 4 TR909 PHH 2 TY L Tom mf TR606 Cym River TY Snrp TR909 Snr 5 TR808 PHH TY L Tom f TR808 Cym Thunder TY Snr mf TR909 Snr 6 TR606 PHH 1 TY L Tom ff Reverse Cym Monsoon TY Snr f TR808 Snr 4 TR606 PHH 2 TY M Tom mf ClassicHseHt Stream TY Snr ff Lite Snare HipHop OHH TY M Tom f Narrow Hit 1 Bubble TY Rim p TR808 Snr 5 TR909 OHH 1 TY M Tom ff Narrow Hit 2 Bird Song TY Rim mf TR808 Snr 6 TR909 OHH 2 TY H Tom mf Euro Hit Dog Bark TY Rim f TR606 Snr 2 TR808 OHH 1 TY H Tom f Dist Hit Gallop TY Rim ff CR78 Snare TR808 OHH 2 TY H Tom ff Thin Beef Vint Phone SFSnrp Urbn Sn Roll TR606 OHH SF L Tom mf Tao Hit Office Phone SF Snr mf Reg Stick Lo Bit OHH 1 SF L Tom ff Smear Hit 1 Mobile Phone SFSnrf Soft Stick Lo Bit OHH 2 SF M Tom mf Smear Hit 2 Door Creak SF Snr ff Hard Stick Lo Bit OHH 3 SF M Tom f LoFi Min Hit Door Slam SF SnrGsti Wild Stick Lite OHH SF M Tom ff Orch Hit Car Engine SF SnrGst2 R amp B ShrtRim1 CR78 OHH SF H Tom mf Punch Hit Car Slip SF Rim p R amp B ShrtRim2 Noise OHH 1 SF H Tom f O Skool Hit Car Pass
51. LD L Tom TY L Tom Reg L Tom Reg L Tom EFL 2 Reg CHH 2 Reg CHH 2 Reg CHH 2 Reg CHH 2 Reg CHH 2 45 SF M Tom TY M Tom LD M Tom TY M Tom Reg M Tom 1 Reg M Tom ErE Reg OHH Reg OHH Reg OHH Reg OHH Reg OHH Reg OHH 47 SF MT Fim TY M Tom LD M Tom TY M Tom Reg M Tom 2 Reg M TomFim C348 SF H Tom TY H Tom LD H Tom TY H Tom Reg H Tom 1 Reg H Tom EE Crash 1 Crash Cymia Crash Cymia Crash Cym 2 Crash Cym1 Crash 1 50 SF HT Fim TY H Tom LD H Tom TY H Tom Reg H Tom 2 Reg H TomFlm EEN Rock Ride 1 Rock Ride 1 Rock Ride 1 Rock Ride 1 Rock Ride Rock Ride 1 52 China Cymbal China Cymbal China Cymbal China Cymbal China Cymbal China Cymbal 53 Splash Cym Splash Cym Splash Cym Splash Cym Ride Edge Splash Cym ENE Tamborine2 Tamborine 3 Tamborine 3 Tamborine2 Tamborine Tamborine 55 Rock Crash 1 Rock Crash 1 Rock Crash 1 Crash Cymia Crash Cym2a Rock Crash 1 EE cowe Cowbell3 Cowbell3 Cowbell3 Cowbell Low Cowbell Hi 57 Crash Cymib Crash Cymib Crash Cym1 Crash Cymib Crash Cym2b Crash Cymib ES Cowbell2 Lng Cowbell2 Lng Cowbell Cowbell2 Lng Cowbell Hi Cowbell Low Rock Ride 2 Rock Ride 2 Rock Ride 2 Rock Ride 2 Ride Bell Rock Ride 2 c4 60 Conga 2H Mt Conga Hi Mt Conga 2H Mt Conga 2H Mt Conga Hi Mt Conga Hi Mt nm Conga 2L Mt Conga Lo Mt Conga 2L Mt Conga 2L Mt Conga Lo Mt Conga Lo Mt 62 Conga 2H 51 Conga Hi Sip Conga 2H Sip Conga 2H Sip Conga Lo Conga Hi 51 EE Conga 2H Op Conga Hi Op Conga 2H Op Conga 2H Op Conga Hi Op Conga Hi Op 64 Conga 2L
52. LowTom1 PowerLowTom1 E Low Tom 1 Ana Low Tom1 Low Tom 1 Pedal Hi hat Pedal Hi hat Pedal Hi hat Pedal Hi hat Ana ClosedHH Pedal Hi hat Mid Tom 2 Room MidTom2 PowerMidTom2 E Mid Tom 2 Ana Mid Tom2 Mid Tom 2 Open Hi hat Open Hi hat Open Hi hat Open Hi hat Ana Open HH Open Hi hat Mid Tom 1 Room MidTom1 PowerMidTom1 E Mid Tom 1 Ana Mid Tom1 Mid Tom 1 High Tom 2 Room Hi Tom2 Power HiTom2 E Hi Tom 2 Ana Hi Tom2 High Tom 2 CrashCymbal1 CrashCymbal1 CrashCymbal1 CrashCymbal1 Ana Cymbal CrashCymbal1 High Tom 1 Room Hi Tom1 Power HiTom1 E Hi Tom 1 Ana Hi Tom1 High Tom 1 Ride Cymbal1 Ride Cymbal1 Ride Cymbal1 Ride Cymbal1 Ride Cymbal1 Ride Cymbal1 China Cymbal China Cymbal China Cymbal Reverse Cym China Cymbal China Cymbal Ride Bell Ride Bell Ride Bell Ride Bell Ride Bell Ride Bell Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine SplashCymbal SplashCymbal SplashCymbal SplashCymbal SplashCymbal SplashCymbal Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell Ana Cowbell Cowbell CrashCymbal2 CrashCymbal2 CrashCymbal2 CrashCymbal2 CrashCymbal2 CrashCymbal2 Vibra slap Vibra slap Vibra slap Vibra slap Vibra slap Vibra slap Ride Cymbal2 Ride Cymbal2 Ride Cymbal2 Ride Cymbal2 Ride Cymbal2 Ride Cymbal2 High Bongo High Bongo High Bongo High Bongo High Bongo High Bongo Low Bongo Low Bongo Low Bongo Low Bongo Low Bongo Low Bongo MuteHi Conga MuteHi Conga MuteHi Conga MuteHi Conga Ana Hi Conga MuteHi Conga OpenHi Conga OpenHi Conga OpenHi Conga OpenHi Conga Ana Mi
53. Prelude By operating the Prelude s keyboard and knobs you can control the image along with your performance on the Prelude 0 Clip Reset Turns the image off solid black 1 All Reset Resets the effect applied to the image and restores all settings such as brightness and hue to their default values 2 Setup Accesses the V LINK SETUP screen Black keys Switch tabs White keys Switch clips D Beam controller Controls the parameter specified in V LINK setup When you turn V LINK on the settings in V LINK setup will take priority for D Beam operation 2 With the V LINK screen shown press V LINK again The V LINK button will go dark and the V LINK setting will be off V LINK Settings V LINK SETUP 1 Press V LINK to access the V LINK screen 2 Press 2 Setup The V LINK SETUP screen will appear 3 Use 1I V to move the cursor to parameter you want to edit 4 Use the VALUE dial to set the value 5 Press EXIT to return to the previous screen V LINK SETUP Parameters Parameter Value Explanation Note Tx Channel A Controls the V Note Tx 1 16 LINK device Channel B Specify the MIDI Note Tx channel Channel C Assigns a V LINK function to the D Beam controller The operation selected by D OFF BEAM buttons will occur regardless of whether V LINK is on or off ColorEQ 1 Used with Fore Modulation motiondive
54. Prelude to Its Factory Settings You can return all of Prelude s settings to the factory set state This is called Factory Reset NOTE If the Prelude s internal memory already contains important data that you ve created all of this data will be lost when you execute a Factory Reset If you want to keep your data you must save it to USB memory p 48 1 Press MENU 2 Use V 1 to select Utility then press ENTER 3 Use the cursor buttons to select Factory Reset then press ENTER The confirmation message will appear Introduction 4 Press ENTER to execute the Factory Reset If you press EXIT instead you re returned to the previous screen and no Factory Reset takes place 5 Turn the power off and then on again Restoring the factory settings will initialize the System and User Performance settings Preserving Certain Settings Even When You Switch Performances Lock System The settings for which you select ON as described below will not change even when you switch Performances Choosing the settings that will be locked 1 Press the MENU button and select System 2 Confirm your choice by pressing ENTER 3 Press the p button several times until the System Lock page is displayed 4 Use A 1 to select the parameter and turn the VALUE dial to select the value Parameter Explanation Value Th le will not ch h Style e Style wi
55. SPLIT and playing the desired key NOTE The lowest split point note is C 2 The screen doesn t display notes lower than the C 2 Using Dual Mode DUALI Dual is the mode in which two Tones are layered so that they sound together In Dual mode one Tone is called the Upper Tone and the other is called the Lower Tone 1 Press DUAL so the button is lit The Tone you selected in Single mode will be the Tone for the Upper Part 2 Use lt q 1 p gt to select the Upper or Lower part if you wish to assign it a different Tone 19 Keyboard Mode Functions 3 To exit Dual mode press DUAL once again so its light goes out Selecting Tone The Prelude contains more than 1000 different Tones You can use these Tones in the three keyboard modes Single Split Dual In Split mode or Dual mode you can use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the Tone number of the Upper Tone or Lower Tone and select a different Tone for each Using the VALUE dial 1 Press TONE so the button is lit 2 Use 1 p gt to select the Upper or Lower part 3 Turn the VALUE dial to step through the Tones one by one Alternatively you can press one of the TONE SELECT buttons PIANO SPECIAL to select a Tone by category When the cursor in the screen is at the Tone number you can also select a Tone by turning NUMERIC on using the TONE SELECT buttons to enter a To
56. Songs Played Back TRANSPOSE 21 Adding Harmony to the Upper Tone MELODY INTELL 22 Using the Metronome 22 Other F neltonss anie e RU 22 Backing Track Functions 23 Selecting the Backing Types Style Song USB Memory Player 23 Adjusting the Volume Balance between Backing and Keyboard BALANCE butfons 23 Adjusting the Tempo TAP TEMPO 23 Using the metronome ee mwm 23 Style Playing with an Accompaniment 24 Playing Back a Style 5 24 Changing the Variations 24 Stopping nr ee RP d es 24 Adjusting the Part Balance PART VIEW 24 Sync Start Stop SYNC 25 Saving the Current Settings in Performance 25 Selecting a Music 25 Selectinig a Style Hte eate 25 Adding User Styles Importing from USB 25 Deleting a User Style sss 25 Back up User Style Exporting to USB memory 26 Using the Recommended Sound Settings for a Style IONE TOUCH a 26 Other Functions Related to Music Style 26 SOM Gr o asas
57. Step Rate 0 10 20 00 Hz note Rate period of pitch change Adjusts the method that will be used to hear the sound that is out put to the OUTPUT jacks The opti Output Mode SPEAKER PHONES mal 3D effect will be achieved if you select SPEAKER when using speakers or PHONES when using headphones Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Volume balance between the di Balance D100 0W DO 100W rect sound D and the flanger sound W Level 0 127 Output Level CHORUS A chorus effect that lets you apply an effect independently to the low frequency and high frequency ranges O High Band Chorus Split Low Band Chorus Lin pli Split High Band Chorus P E Low Band Chorus Ex O Rin R out Parameter Range Explanation a Frequency at which the low and Split Freq gee COR ie high ranges will be divided Delay time from when the origi Low Pre Delay 0 0 100 0 ms nal sound is heard to when the low range chorus sound is heard Rate at which the low range cho Low Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz note rus sound is modulated Low 0 127 Modulation depth for the low P B range chorus sound Low Phase 0 180 de Spaciousness of the low range 9 chorus sound Delay time from when the origi High Pre Delay 0 0 100 0 ms nal sound is heard to when the high range chorus sound is heard Rate at which the low range cho
58. a Style as the backing If you turn all of BACKING TYPE STYLE SONG and USB MEMORY PLAYER off you ll hear only the drum part of the currently selected Style Just as when STYLE is on you ll be able to use the STYLE CONTROL buttons and VARIATION buttons to choose different variations SONG p 26 You can use the recording function to record your own performance into the Prelude Since a 16 track sequencer is built in you can use multi track recording to create a song by recording a different sound on each track A song you ve created can also be used as the backing for your keyboard performance SMF data can be loaded into the user Song and played back USB MEMORY PLAYER p 30 This allows you to play back audio files or SMF data that s been saved on USB memory You can use this playback as the backing for your keyboard performance Adjusting the Volume Balance between Backing and Keyboard BALANCE buttons Use BALANCE BACKING and KEYBOARD to adjust the volume balance between the backing and your keyboard performance If you press BALANCE BACKING and KEYBOARD simultaneously the volume balance will return to its original value If you ve changed the volume balance the button whose volume is higher will be lit NOTE This setting cannot be stored Adjusting the Tempo TAP NOTE You can t adjust the tempo of audio data 1 Press TAP TEMPO three or more times at the desi
59. dB 712 dB gentle P err 24 dB steep 36 dB extremely steep Filter Filter resonance level R 0 127 Increasing this value will emphasize the esonance region near cutoff frequency Filter Gain 0 12 dB Amount of boost for the filter output Level 0 127 Output level ENHANCER Controls the overtone structure of the high frequencies adding sparkle and tightness to the sound L in ES NUS Ao Eon LL out Mix iEn ga accu m s Parameter Value Description Sens 0 127 Sensitivity of the enhancer e Level of the overtones generat Mix oer ed by the enhancer Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Level 0 127 Output Level 59 08 AUTO WAH Cyclically controls a filter to create cyclic change in timbre Lin 2 Band EQ L out Rin 2 Band EQ R out Parameter Value Description Type of filter LPF The wah effect will be applied over Filter Type LPF BPF a wide frequency range BPF The wah effect will be applied over a narrow frequency range Manual 0 127 Adjusts the center frequency at which the effect is applied Adjusts the amount of the wah effect that will occur in the range of the center fre Peak 0 127 quency Set a higher value for Q to narrow the range to be affected Sons 0 127 Adjusts the sensitivity with which the filter is controlled Sets the direction in which the frequency
60. enter chords only the drum pattern of the Style will be heard 3 Use your left hand to play a chord or a single note Use your left hand to play the backing chord and your right hand to play the melody 4 If you play a different chord or single note the backing chord will change The chord name is displayed in the backing chord area of the screen 5 Usethe STYLE CONTROL buttons to select a different pattern for the currently selected Style INTRO backing pattern suitable for an introduction MAIN This is the main accompaniment pattern for the song ENDING A backing pattern suitable for an ending lt i If STYLE is unlit pressing START STOP will cause only the drums to start playing Changing the Variations You can press the VARIATION buttons to change the type of ensemble that will play the backing The button you press flashes until the new pattern is used after which the button lights steadily VARIATION 1 produces the simplest arrangement and VARIATION 4 produces the most florid For an intro or ending VARIATION 1 is the shortest and simplest Using the Auto Fill in Function If you leave AUTO FILL IN on button lit a fill in will play when you switch between accompaniment Variations The fill in that is played between the current and the next Variation pattern depends on where you come from What s a Fill In A short improvisational phrase insert
61. gt II to play the Song To stop press B gt 1 once again Use the cursor buttons to select Delete then press ENTER Backing Track Functions When you record a Song using a Style the Style data is recorded in the first measure of the Song When you play back this Song playback will begin from measure indication 2 NOTE When you select a user Song the temporary Song memory will be overwritten by the user Song you selected You can t play back SMF data that contains more than 16 parts 29 Backing Track Functions Moving the playback location of a song Use the SONG buttons to specify the song playback location 19 Returns to beginning of the song Rewinds the song 4 Fast forwards the song Pe Bi Moves to the end of the song gt II Plays or pauses the song Performing along with a song MINUS ONE CENTER CANCEL You can press MINUS ONE CENTER CANCEL to mute silence the specified Part This is called the Minus One function To specify the Part that will be muted see below Each time you press MINUS ONE CENTER CANCEL the Minus One function will be turned on button lit or off button unlit Specifying the Part that will be muted 1 Press MENU 2 Use 1I V 1to select Minus One Setting then press ENTER You can also call up this page bt pressing and holding the MINUS ONE button 3 Use the cursor buttons to
62. in this mode Using Piano Mode Regardless of the keyboard mode that is currently selected you can use the following operation to call up the Piano Mode This will make the appropriate settings for playing piano on the Prelude the entire keyboard will play a piano sound 1 Press SPLIT and DUAL PIANO MODE simultaneously Using Split Mode SPLIT Such a division of the keyboard into right and left hand sections is called a Split and the key where the division takes place is called the Split Point While in Split mode a sound played in the right side is called an Upper Tone and the sound played in the left side is a Lower Tone The Split Point key is included in the upper section The Split Point has been set at the factory to CA 1 Press SPLIT so the button is lit The Tone you selected in Single mode will be the Tone for the Upper Part 2 Use 1 p gt to select the Upper or Lower part if you wish to assign it a different Tone 3 To exit Split mode press SPLIT once again so its light goes out In Split mode the most suitable octave settings for each Tone are applied automatically Changing the Split Point 1 Press and hold SPLIT for approximately two seconds The Split Point setting screen will appear 2 Turn the VALUE dial to change the Split Point 3 When yov re finished making the setting press EXIT You can also change the Split Point by holding down
63. keep the unit s volume at reasonable levels You may prefer to use headphones so you do not need to be concerned about those around you especially when it is late at night When you need to transport the unit package it in the box including padding that it came in if possible Otherwise you will need to use equivalent packaging materials Do not apply undue force to the music stand while it is in use Use only the specified expression pedal EV 5 sold separately By connecting any other expression pedals you risk causing malfunction and or damage to the unit Some connection cables contain resistors Do not use cables that incorporate resistors for connecting to this unit The use of such cables can cause the sound level to be extremely low or impos sible to hear For information on cable specifications contact the manufacturer of the cable The sensitivity of the D Beam controller will change depending on the amount of light in the vicinity of the unit If it does not function as you expect adjust the sensitivity as appropriate for the brightness of your location Using USB Memory When connecting USB memory firmly insert it all the way in Do not touch the pins of the USB memory connector or allow them to become dirty USB memory is made using high precision electronic components so please observe the following points when handling it To prevent damage from static electrical charges discharge any static electric
64. near devices that radiate heat leave it inside an enclosed vehicle or otherwise subject it to temperature extremes Excessive heat can deform or discolor the unit When moved from one location to another where the temperature and or humidity is very different water droplets condensation may form inside the unit Damage or malfunction may result if you attempt to use the unit in this condition Therefore before using the unit you must allow it to stand for several hours until the conden sation has completely evaporated Do not allow objects to remain on top of the keyboard This can be the cause of malfunction such as keys ceasing to produce sound Depending on the material and temperature of the surface on which you place the unit its rubber feet may discolor or mar the surface You can place a piece of felt or cloth under the rubber feet to prevent this from happening If you do so please make sure that the unit will not slip or move accidentally Maintenance For everyday cleaning wipe the unit with a soft dry cloth or one that has been slightly dampened with water To remove stubborn dirt use a cloth impregnated with a mild non abrasive detergent Afterwards be sure to wipe the unit thoroughly with a soft dry cloth Never use benzine thinners alcohol or solvents of any kind to avoid the possibility of discoloration and or deformation Repairs and Data Please be aware that all data contained in the unit s memory may
65. not change when you OFF ON switch Performances Tone not change when you OFF ON switch Performances Th let ill not ch Sis Tangs e Style tempo will not change OFF ON when you switch Performances The transpose setting p 21 will not Transpose change when you switch OFF ON Performances 5 Press EXIT You will see the message System Write Completed These settings are system parameters p 45 Introduction Input settings for the EXT INPUT jack Here you can specify whether the sound from the EXT INPUT jack p 15 will be used You can also specify whether the Center Cancel function will be applied to the sound from the EXT INPUT jack NOTE When connection cables with resistors are used the volume level of equipment connected to the EXT INPUT sockets may be low If this happens use connection cables that do not contain resistors Center Cancel function minimizes playback volume of sound that s heard from the center e g vocal or melody instrument 1 Press MENU 2 Use 11 V 1 select Ext Input Setting then press ENTER 3 Use 11 V 1to select item that you want to change Parameter Explanation Value External Turns the input from the EXT Input INPUT jack ON or OFF Specifies whether the Center Cancel function will be applied to the sound from the EXT INPUT OFF ON jack ON or will not be applied OFF C
66. o Ma 14 ACCOMPANIMENT eee 24 Arabic Soo semet p vase RD CIS 20 ASSIGNABLE T rete oie Peter e dee Pete s 34 ASSIGNABLE eene rugs 34 Assignable pedal sss 36 AttackTime NOR TENE 38 Avdio File usa uman Sum 30 AUTO FILE N S 24 Auto Fillin 2585 took iN Su RR ee 24 B Backing dicen penne TT e o idt 13 Backing Hold 3 the ette 37 BACKING TYPE buttons aaa 10 Backing Types ie recte esce tte tecto 23 Backup eR 48 BALANCE BACKING sii eared t n 23 KEYBOARD ot tr FG 23 BALANCE buttons a n 10 Bass Inversion tette rte reete art nes 37 Bend news teh ip es 45 C Center Cancel 18 32 Chain Play ELDER 33 Chord Intelligence reinis tote Ais 102 Chord i eren 37 e 40 Output Select 40 yeni eter eene ye ee UU 82 Chorus Send Level ee terere 38 CompUler coetu hane 44 Connecting AG Adaptor tissue OS TR REPRE 14 teet pen 44 External equipment sse 15 MID 42 Pedal and switch 15 Portable audio player 15 CONTROL PEDAL jack 12 15 36 Control Pedal Switch namimi 39 Gord hook s de UR eis 12
67. of a radio As this Detune value is raised the tuning drifts further Radio Noise 0 127 Volume of the radio noise Level Balance D100 0W Volume balance between the direct sound DO 100W D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level TELEPHONE Lin Telephone L out Rin Telephone R out Parameter Value Description Guay 0 15 Audio quality of the telephone voice Treble 15 15 dB Bandwidth of the telephone voice Balance D100 0 Volume balance between the direct sound DO 100W D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level ru PHONOGRAPH Simulates a sound recorded on an analog record and played back on a record player This effect also simulates the various types of noise that are typical of a record and even the rotational irregularities of an old turntable Balance D Balance W Phonograph Phonograph L out CY Balance W R out Balance D Parameter Value Description Signal 0 127 Depth of distortion Frequency response of the playback system Frequency Decreasing this value will produce the im 0 127 Range pression of an old system with a poor fre quency response Rotational speed of the turntable Disc Type LP EP SP This will affect the frequency of the scratch noise Scratch Noise Amount of noise due to scratches on the 0 127 Level record Dust Noise 0 127 Volume o noise
68. p gt The Octave Shift window will open and will then close a few moments after you release the button 2 While holding down OCTAVE or p gt use Cursor p gt to select the Upper or Lower part whose pitch you want to shift 3 Use OCTAVE p gt to change the octave Transposing Keyboard Sounds and Songs Played Back TRANSPOSE By using the Transpose function you can transpose your performance without changing the notes you play You can also use this function to play back a song in a different key 1 Press TRANSPOSE The Transpose window will open and will then close a few moments after you release the button 2 While holding down TRANSPOSE use A 1I V J to select the item whose setting you want to change Parameter Explanation Value The playback of Songs recorded with or imported into the Song Trans Prelude and of SMF data 29 31 will be transposed 21 Keyboard Mode Functions Parameter Explanation Value KBD Trans The sound of the keyboard will OFF ON be transposed F G A e The m pitch 5 6 E C semitones Cit D Eb EF NOTE Audio data cannot be transposed 3 Hold down TRANSPOSE and use the VALUE dial to specify the desired value TRANSPOSE will light if the setting is anything other than C By holding down TRANSPOSE and using OCTAVE lt p gt you can change the Transpose value reg
69. select the Part that you want to mule 4 Turn the VALUE dial to set it to ON or OFF 5 When yov re finished making settings press EXIT This setting is system parameter Back Up Song Files Song data you created on the Prelude can be saved on USB memory For details refer to Saving User Data to USB Memory Backup 48 Other Functions Related to Song cf gt Using Preset Performances p 36 Using the Metronome 22 Saving User Data to USB Memory Backup p 48 Loading User Data Saved on USB Memory Import p 48 USB Memory Player SMF Audio File Player Playlist Playlist is a function that lets you create a list of songs in a specified order and play them back consecutively on the Prelude You can use the Playlist Editor software supplied with the Prelude to create a playlist on your computer Songlist The list of songs specified in the playlist is called a Songlist Creating a playlist Start up Playlist Editor and create a playlist For details on creating a playlist refer to PlaylistEditorManualE pdf which is installed together with Playlist Editor you ll find it in the Help menu NOTE You cannot create playlists on Prelude itself You can play back individual songs even without creating a playlist see Playing Back SMF Audio Files This only works for SMF or audio files in the root directory of your USB memory Only audio f
70. selecta parameter Turn the VALUE dial to select the desired D Beam function 4 When you ve finished making settings press EXIT The Main screen will appear These settings are system parameters p 45 Functions that can be assigned D Beam Explanation function P A snare drum roll will continue as long as your DRUM hand is positioned over the D Beam Move your ROLL hand closer to increase the volume and move your hand rapidly away to play a cymbal Chimes will sound when you position your hand CHIMES above the D Beam The volume is greater when you move your hand more rapidly The sound of bubbles will continue as long as 2 Th BuBBLE YO hand is positioned above the D Beam The volume will increase as you move your hand closer Beam Explanation function P The sound of running water will continue as long STREAM 95 your hand is positioned above the D Beam The volume will increase as you move your hand closer An explosion will sound when you position your EXPLO h SION and over the D Beam The volume is greater when you move your hand more rapidly A pistol shot will sound when you position your GUN hand over th he volume i SHOT and over the D Beam The volume is greater when you move your hand more rapidly An engine will continue sounding as long as ENGINE YOU nune positioned above the D Beam The volume will increase as you move your hand cl
71. sound This 2 voice pitch shifter has two pitch shifters and can add two pitch shifted sounds to the original sound Balance D Lin Level 1 Rin Balance D Parameter Value Description a 1 24412 semi Adjusts the pitch of Pitch Shift 1 oarse in semitone steps Adjusts the pitch of Pitch Shift Pitch T Fine Pitch 1 in 2 cent steps 100 100 cent Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the Pitch Shift 1 sound is heard Pitch 1 Delay 0 1300 ms note Adjusts the proportion of the pitch shifted sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Pitch 1 Feedback 98 98 Stereo location of the Pitch Shift Pitch 1 Pan L64 63R 1 sound Pitch 1 Level 0 127 Volume of the Pitch Shift sound Pitch 2 24 12 semi Coarse Pitch 2 Fine Pitch 2 Delay Pitch 2 Feedback 98 98 100 100 cent Settings of the Pitch Shift 2 0 1300 ms note sound The parameters are the same as for the Pitch Shift 1 sound Pitch 2 Pan L64 63R Pitch 2 Level 0 127 Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Volume balance between the Pitch Shift 1 and Pitch Shift 2 sounds Level Balance A100 0B A0 100B Volume balance between the di Balance D100 0W DO 100W rect sound D and the pitch shift ed sound W Level 0 127 Output Level step PITCH SHIFTER A
72. time Button Explanation Lets you change the pitch of the sounds PITCH 9 you play on the keyboard Changes the tonal character of the sounds you play n the keyboard For FILTER some sounds the timbre change be difficult to notice Changes the volume of the sounds you VOLUME play on the keyboard 2 While you play the keyboard to produce sound place your hand above the D Beam controller and move it slowly up and down The button you pressed in step 1 above flashes 3 To turn off the D Beam controller once again press the button you pressed in step 1 so the indicator goes out The usable range of the D Beam controller The diagram shows the usable range of the D Beam controller Waving your hand outside this range will produce no effect NOTE The usable range of the D Beam controller will become extremely small when used under strong direct sunlight Please be aware of this when using the D Beam controller outside mk NOTE The sensitivity of the D Beam controller will change depending on the amount of light in the vicinity of the unit If it does not function as you expect adjust the D Beam Sens parameter as appropriate for the brightness of your location Increase this value will raise the sensitivity p 46 Assigning a function to the D Beam controller Press and hold the FILTER or VOLUME button The D BEAM screen will appear 2 Usel 1L V 1 to
73. will change when the auto wah filter is modulated Polarity UP DOWN UP The filter will change toward a high er frequency DOWN The filter will change toward a lower frequency Rate Dor Frequency of modulation note Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation Adjusts the degree of phase shift of the left Phase 0 180 deg and right sounds when the wah effect is applied Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range High Gain 15 415 dB Gain of the high range Level 0 127 Output Level 09 HUMANIZER Adds a vowel character to the sound making it similar to a human Parameter Value Description Point at which Vowel 1 2 switch 49 or less Vowel 1 will have a longer duration Manual 0 100 50 Vowel 1 and 2 will be of equal du ration 51 or more Vowel 2 will have a longer duration Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low frequency range High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high frequency range Pan L64 63R Stereo location of the output Level 0 127 Output level SPEAKER SIMULATOR Simulates the speaker type and mic settings used to record the speaker sound Parameter Value Description Speaker Type See the table below Type of speaker Adjusts the location of the mic that is recording the sound of the speaker Mic Setting 1 2 3 This can be adjusted in three steps with the mic becoming more distant in the order of 1 2 and 3 Mic Level 0 127 Volume
74. 02 DELAY s Adjusts the delay time from the d justs the delay time from the direct Delay Manele sound until delay sound is heard lay Center Adjusts the proportion of the delay Center Feed 98 98 sound that is fed back into the effect back Negative settings will invert the 9 9 phase Adjusts the frequency above which sound fed back to the effect will be cut HF Damp ee Hz If you do not want to cut the high fre quencies set this parameter to BY PASS Left Level Right Level 0 127 Volume of each delay sound Center Level 03 GM2 CHORUS Cuts the high frequency range of the sound coming into the chorus ere Oe Higher values will cut more of the high frequencies Level 0 127 Volume of the chorus sound r Adjusts the amount of the chorus sound Feedback EU that is fed back into the effect Adjusts the delay time from the direct Delay 9127 sound until the chorus sound is heard Rate 0 127 Frequency of modulation Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation Send Level To 0 127 Adjusts the amount of chorus sound that Reverb will be sent to reverb 82 If you specify the delay time as a note value slowing down the tempo will not change the delay time beyond a certain length This is because there is an upper limit for the delay time if the delay time is specified as a note value and you slow down the tempo until this upper limit is reached the delay time cannot change any further This upper limit i
75. 1 63 SoftNyln Gtr AC GUITAR 87 65 35 240 Doze Bass SYNTH BASS 87 65 112 64 SC Nylon Gt AC GUITAR 87 65 36 241 DCO Bass SYNTH BASS 87 65 113 65 Wet Nyln Gtr AC GUITAR 87 65 37 242 Virtual RnBs SYNTH BASS 87 65 114 66 Pre Mass Hum AC GUITAR 87 65 38 243 Saw amp MG Bass SYNTH BASS 87 65 115 67 Thick Steel AC GUITAR 87 65 39 244 MG SubOsc Bs SYNTH BASS 87 65 116 68 Uncle Martin AC GUITAR 87 65 40 245 R amp B Bass 2 SYNTH BASS 87 65 117 69 Wide Ac Gtr AC GUITAR 87 65 41 246 R amp B Bass 3 SYNTH BASS 87 65 118 70 Comp Stl Gtr AC GUITAR 87 65 42 247 Nota Bass SYNTH BASS 87 65 119 71 Stl Gtr Duo AC GUITAR 87 65 43 248 ResoSyn Bs 1 SYNTH BASS 87 65 120 72 SC 12str Gtr AC GUITAR 87 65 44 249 SH 1 Bass SYNTH BASS 87 65 121 73 So good AC GUITAR 87 65 45 250 SH 101 Bs 2 SYNTH BASS 87 65 122 74 StratSeq nce EL GUITAR 87 65 46 251 Punch MG 1 SYNTH BASS 87 65 123 75 Jazz Guitar EL GUITAR 87 65 47 252 MKS 50 SynBs SYNTH BASS 87 65 124 76 DynoJazz Gtr EL GUITAR 87 65 48 253 Gashed Bass SYNTH BASS 87 65 125 77 Clean Gtr EL GUITAR 87 65 49 254 Q Bass SYNTH BASS 87 65 126 78 Crimson Gtr EL GUITAR 87 65 50 255 Super G DX SYNTH BASS 87 65 127 79 Plug n Gig EL GUITAR 87 65 51 256 Bass SYNTH BASS 87 65 128 80 Kinda Kurt EL GUITAR 87 65 52 257 OilDrum Bass SYNTH BASS 87 66 1 81 Nice Oct Gtr EL GUITAR 87 65 53 258 Dust Ba
76. 1 1 971 Dist GTR DIST GUITAR 121 2 972 Gt Harmonics EL GUITAR 121 0 32 973 Gt Feedback EL GUITAR 121 1 974 Acoustic Bs BASS 121 0 33 975 Fingered Bs BASS 121 0 34 976 Finger Slap BASS 121 1 977 Picked Bass BASS 121 0 35 978 Fretless Bs BASS 121 0 36 979 Slap Bass 1 BASS 121 0 37 980 Slap Bass 2 BASS 121 0 38 981 Synth Bass 1 SYNTH BASS 121 0 39 982 SynthBass101 SYNTH BASS 121 1 983 Acid Bass SYNTH BASS 121 2 984 Clavi Bass SYNTH BASS 121 3 985 Hammer SYNTH BASS 121 4 986 Synth Bass 2 SYNTH BASS 121 0 40 987 Beef FM Bass SYNTH BASS 121 1 988 RubberBass 2 SYNTH BASS 121 2 989 Attack Pulse SYNTH BASS 121 3 990 Violin STRINGS 121 0 Al 991 Slow Violin STRINGS 121 1 992 Viola STRINGS 121 0 42 993 Cello STRINGS 121 0 43 994 Contrabass STRINGS 121 0 44 995 Tremolo Str STRINGS 121 0 45 996 PizzicatoStr STRINGS 121 0 46 997 Harp PLUCKED 121 0 47 No Name Category MSB LSB PC 998 Yang Qin PLUCKED 2 1 999 Timpani PERCUSSION 2 0 48 000 Strings STRINGS 2 0 49 001 Orchestra ORCHESTRA 2 1 002 60s Strings STRINGS 2 2 003 Slow Strings STRINGS 2 0 50 004 Syn Strings1 STRINGS 2 0 51 005 Syn Strings3 STRINGS 2 1 006 Syn Strings2 SOFT PAD 2 0 52 007 Choir Aahs VOX 2 0 53 008 Chorus Aahs VOX 2 1 009 Voice Oohs VOX 2 0 54 010 Humming VOX 2 1 011 SynVox VOX 2 0 55 012 Analog Voice VOX 2 1 013 OrchestraHit HIT amp STAB
77. 15 15 dB Amount of low range boost cut EQ Mid Freq 200 8000 Hz Frequency of the midrange EQ EQ Mid Gain 15 15 dB Amount of midrange boost cut 0 5 1 0 2 0 4 0 Width of midrange larger values EQ Mid Q 8 0 make the region narrower EQ High Freq 2000 8000 Frequency of the high range EQ EQ High Gain 15 15 dB Amount of high range boost cut Level 0 127 Output Level 81 Chorus Parameters The Prelude s Chorus effect unit can also be used as a stereo delay unit These settings allow you to select chorus or delay and the characteristics of the selected effect type Parameter Value Description Selects either Chorus or Delay 0 OFF O OFF Neither Chorus or Delay is used Chorus Type n 1 CHORUS Chorus is used 3 GM2 CHORUS 2 DELAY Delay is used 3 GM2 CHORUS GM2 Chorus is used 01 CHORUS Type of filter OFF no filter is used n LPF cuts the frequency range above Filter Type OFF LPF HPF the Cutoff Freq HPF cuts the frequency range be low the Cutoff Freq Cutoff Freq 200 8000 Hz Basic frequency of the filter Adjusts the delay time from the direct Pre Delay S IOS sound until the chorus sound is heord Rote ia MID He Frequency of modulation Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation Phase 0 180 Spatial spread of the sound Adjusts the amount of the chorus sound Feedback 9 122 that is fed back into the effect
78. 2 0 56 014 Bass Hit HIT amp STAB 2 1 015 6th Hit HIT amp STAB 2 2 016 Euro Hit HIT amp STAB 2 3 017 Trumpet AC BRASS 2 0 57 018 Dark Trumpet AC BRASS 2 1 019 Trombone AC BRASS 2 0 58 020 Trombone 2 AC BRASS 2 1 021 Bright Tb AC BRASS 2 2 022 Tuba AC BRASS 2 0 59 023 MutedTrumpet AC BRASS 2 0 60 024 MuteTrumpet2 AC BRASS 2 1 025 French Horns AC BRASS 2 0 61 026 Fr Horn 2 AC BRASS 2 1 027 Brass 1 AC BRASS 2 0 62 028 Brass 2 AC BRASS 2 1 029 Synth Brass SYNTH BRASS 2 0 63 030 JP Brass SYNTH BRASS 2 1 031 Oct SynBrass SYNTH BRASS 2 2 032 Jump Brass SYNTH BRASS 2 3 033 Synth Brass2 SYNTH BRASS 2 0 64 034 SynBrass sfz SYNTH BRASS 2 1 035 Velo Brass 1 SYNTH BRASS 2 2 036 Soprano Sax SAX 2 0 65 037 Alto Sax SAX 2 0 66 038 Tenor Sax SAX 2 0 67 039 Baritone Sax SAX 2 0 68 040 Oboe WIND 2 0 69 041 English Horn WIND 2 0 70 042 WIND 2 0 71 043 Clarinet WIND 2 0 72 044 Piccolo FLUTE 2 0 73 045 Flute FLUTE 2 0 74 046 Recorder FLUTE 2 0 75 047 Pan Flute FLUTE 2 0 76 048 Bottle Blow FLUTE 2 0 77 049 Shakuhachi ETHNIC 2 0 78 050 Whistle FLUTE 2 0 79 051 Ocarina FLUTE 2 0 80 052 Square Wave HARD LEAD 2 0 81 053 MG Square HARD LEAD 2 1 054 2600 Sine HARD LEAD 2 2 055 Saw Wave HARD LEAD 2 0 82 056 OB2 Saw HARD LEAD 2 1 057 Doctor Solo HARD LEAD 2 2 058 Natural Lead HARD LEAD 2 3 059 SequencedSaw HARD LEAD 2 4 060 Syn Calliope SOFT LEAD 2 0 83
79. 4 Upper Part 12 5 Accomp 3 13 6 14 7 Accomp 4 15 Melody Intelligence 8 Accomp 5 16 You can specify whether the metronome will sound during recording See Using the Metronome p 22 Recording a specified Part SONG TRACK In the SONG TRACK screen you can specify the Part that you want to record A performance using one Tone will be recorded on each Part NOTE If you re recording on a specified Part recording with a Style may cause your performance to be recorded together with the performance generated by the Style depending on the Part you ve specified If you re recording on a specified Part we recommend that you play without using Styles Backing Track Functions NOTE 40 will apply only to the realtime performance of the Part Upper Part or Lower Part you play by hand Be aware that MFX will not apply to the recorded Song data When SONG is on you can press PART VIEW repeatedly to switch from the Main screen to SONG TRACK PERFORM MIXER 24 Main screen 1 Press SONG so the button is lit 2 Press PART VIEW so the button is lit The SONG TRACK screen will appear Initializing a Song 3 Use the cursor buttons to select the INIT icon then press ENTER The Song Initialize window will appear 4 As needed use the cursor buttons and VALUE dial to specify the tempo and time signature of the Song 5 Use the cursor buttons to select the INIT icon once again
80. 5 93 298 Dolce Qrt STRINGS 87 66 42 222 Boss v Thmb BASS 87 65 94 299 Chamber Str STRINGS 87 66 43 223 SC Slap Bass BASS 87 65 95 300 Small Str STRINGS 87 66 44 224 X Slap Bass BASS 87 65 96 301 Marcato STRINGS 87 66 45 225 Low Bass SYNTH BASS 87 65 97 302 Bright Str STRINGS 87 66 46 226 Mini Like SYNTH BASS 87 65 98 303 String Ens STRINGS 87 66 47 227 MC 404 Bass SYNTH BASS 87 65 99 304 SonicStrings STRINGS 87 66 48 85 No Name Category MSB LSB PC 305 Stringz 101 STRINGS 87 66 49 306 Crossed Bows STRINGS 87 66 50 307 Warm Strings STRINGS 87 66 51 308 Stacc mp Str STRINGS 87 66 52 309 Movie Scene STRINGS 87 66 53 310 Hybrid Str 1 STRINGS 87 66 54 311 Gang Strangs STRINGS 87 66 55 312 Clustered STRINGS 87 66 56 313 Full Strings STRINGS 87 66 57 314 X StrSection STRINGS 87 66
81. 58 315 Oct Strings STRINGS 87 66 59 316 Sahara Str STRINGS 87 66 60 317 Random Mood STRINGS 87 66 61 318 X Hall Str STRINGS 87 66 62 319 SC Slow Str STRINGS 87 66 63 320 Hybrid Str 2 STRINGS 87 66 64 321 Biggie Bows STRINGS 87 66 65 322 Staccato VS STRINGS 87 66 66 323 So Staccato STRINGS 87 66 67 324 DelicatePizz STRINGS 87 66 68 325 Vis PizzHall STRINGS 87 66 69 326 Orch Pizz STRINGS 87 66 70 327 Pizz Stac VS STRINGS 87 66 71 328 Mellow Tron STRINGS 87 66 72 329 Tronic Str STRINGS 87 66 73 330 Tape Memory STRINGS 87 66 74 331 Wind amp Str 1 ORCHESTRA 87 66 75 332 Wind amp Str 2 ORCHESTRA 87 66 76 333 Farewell ORCHESTRA 87 66 77 334 Orch amp Horns ORCHESTRA 87 66 78 335 Soft Orch 1 ORCHESTRA 87 66 79 336 Soft Orch 2 ORCHESTRA 87 66 80 337 Henry ORCHESTRA 87 66 81 338 Ending Scene ORCHESTRA 87 66 82 339 Symphonika ORCHESTRA 87 66 83 340 Mix Hit 2 HIT amp STAB 87 66 84 341 Cheezy Movie HIT amp STAB 87 66 85 342 Philly Hit HIT amp STAB 87 66 86 343 Smear Hit 1 HIT amp STAB 87 66 87 344 Smear Hit 2 HIT amp STAB 87 66 88 345 Good Old Hit HIT amp STAB 87 66 89 346 Mix Hit 1 HIT amp STAB 87 66 90 347 Lo Fi Hit HIT amp STAB 87 66 91 348 2ble Action HIT amp STAB 87 66 92 349 In da Cave HIT amp STAB 87 66 93 350 Housechord HIT amp STAB 87 66 94 351 Mod Chord HIT amp STAB 87
82. 8 Ravers Awake TECHNO SYNTH 87 68 46 559 Tekno Gargle TECHNO SYNTH 87 68 47 560 ranceiver TECHNO SYNTH 87 68 48 561 echno Dream TECHNO SYNTH 87 68 49 562 Techno Pizz TECHNO SYNTH 87 68 50 563 VirtualHuman PULSATING 87 68 51 564 Strobot PULSATING 87 68 52 565 SC Strobe PULSATING 87 68 53 566 Strobe X PULSATING 87 68 54 567 Rhythmic 5th PULSATING 87 68 55 568 Cell Pad PULSATING 87 68 56 569 DarknessSide PULSATING 87 68 57 570 Shape of X PULSATING 87 68 58 571 Sonic Dance PULSATING 87 68 59 572 ShapeURMusic PULSATING 87 68 60 573 Synth Force PULSATING 87 68 61 574 Trance Split PULSATING 87 68 62 575 Step Trance PULSATING 87 68 63 576 Chop Synth PULSATING 87 68 64 577 Euro Teuro PULSATING 87 68 65 578 Auto Trance PULSATING 87 68 66 579 Eureggae PULSATING 87 68 67 580 Sorry4theDLY PULSATING 87 68 68 581 Beat Pad PULSATING 87 68 69 582 TMT Seq Pad PULSATING 87 68 70 583 ForYourBreak PULSATING 87 68 71 584 HPF Slicer PULSATING 87 68 72 585 Sliced Choir PULSATING 87 68 73 586 Digi Doo PULSATING 87 68 74 587 PanningFrmnt PULSATING 87 68 75 588 Dirty Beat PULSATING 87 68 76 589 Electrons PULSATING 87 68 77 590 Protons PULSATING 87 68 78 591 Brisk Vortex PULSATING 87 68 79 592 SC Throbulax PULSATING 87 68 80 593 SC Lonizer PULSATING 87 68 81 594 diGital Pad PULSATING 87 68 82 595 StepPitShift PULSATING 87
83. 87 69 107 671 80s Saws 2 OTHER SYNTH 87 69 31 748 Distant Sun BRIGHT PAD 87 69 108 672 80s Saws 3 OTHER SYNTH 87 69 32 749 PG Chimes BRIGHT PAD 87 69 109 673 Digitaless OTHER SYNTH 87 69 33 750 Saturn Rings BRIGHT PAD 87 69 110 674 Flip Pad OTHER SYNTH 87 69 34 751 Brusky BRIGHT PAD 87 69 111 675 Short Detune OTHER SYNTH 87 69 35 752 2 Point 2 BRIGHT PAD 87 69 112 676 forSequence OTHER SYNTH 87 69 36 753 2 2 Pad BRIGHT PAD 87 69 113 677 Memory Pluck OTHER SYNTH 87 69 37 754 two two Pad BRIGHT PAD 87 69 114 678 Metalic Bass OTHER SYNTH 87 69 38 755 SaturnHolida BRIGHT PAD 87 69 115 679 Aqua OTHER SYNTH 87 69 39 756 NeuroDrone BRIGHT PAD 87 69 116 680 Big Planet OTHER SYNTH 87 69 40 757 In The Pass BRIGHT PAD 87 69 117 681 Wet Atax OTHER SYNTH 87 69 41 758 Polar Night BRIGHT PAD 87 69 118 682 Houze Clavi OTHER SYNTH 87 69 42 759 Cell 5th BRIGHT PAD 87 69 119 683 SuperSawSlow OTHER SYNTH 87 69 43 760 MistOverSths BRIGHT PAD 87 69 120 684 Cell Trance OTHER SYNTH 87 69 44 761 Gritty Pad BRIGHT PAD 87 69 121 685 Trancy X OTHER SYNTH 87 69 45 762 India Garden BRIGHT PAD 87 69 122 686 Trancy Synth OTHER SYNTH 87 69 46 763 BillionStars BRIGHT PAD 87 69 123 687 Juno Trnce OTHER SYNTH 87 69 47 764 Sand Pad BRIGHT PAD 87 69 124 688 Saw Stack OTHER SYNTH 87 69 48 765
84. 9 Snr 5 TR909 Snr 3 Lo Bit Snr 2 TR909 Snr 3 Door Creak2b Jazz Kick p TR909 Tom L Dance CHH Deep Tom L TR909 Tom L2 Syn Swt AtkL Jazz Kick mf TR909 CHH 2 TR606DstCHH1 TR606 CHH 1 TR909 CHH 1 SynSwt Atk7b Jazz Kick f TR909 Tom L TR909 PHH 2 Deep Tom L TR909 Tom L1 Syn Swt AtkL Dry Kick 1 TR909 PHH 2 TR606 PHH 2a TR606 PHH 1 TR909 PHH 1 Syn Mtl Atk2 Tight Kick TR909 Tom M TR909 OHH 1 Deep Tom M TR909 Tom M2 Syn Swt AtkM Old Kick TR909 OHH 2 Lite OHH TR909 OHH 2 TR909 OHH 2 White Noise Jz Dry Kick TR909 Tom M Rock Rd Cup Deep Tom M TR909 Tom M1 Syn Swt AtkM Dry Kick 2 TR909 Tom H Syn Hrd Atk4 Deep Tom H TR909 Tom H2 Syn Swt AtkH Dry Kick 3 TR909 Crash1 MG Zap 7a Lite OHH TR909 Crash Syn Mtl Atk1 Power Kick TR909 Tom H MG Zap 9 Deep Tom H TR909 Tom H1 Syn Swt AtkH R amp B Kick L TR909 Ride 1 MG Zap 8 TR808 OHH 1 TR909 Ride SynLow 1 Rk CmpKick TR909 Crash2 MG Zap 10 TR606 Cym 2a White Noise1 Crotale 1 Dance Kick TR909 Ride 2 HipHop CHH 2 TR909 Ride 1 CR78 Beat Laser 1 HipHop Kick1 CR78 Tamb Syn Swt Atk3 CR78 Tamb Tamborine 3 MG Zap 11 HipHop Kick2 MG Zap 4 Reg PHH TR606 Cym 2b Atmosphere Laser 2 TR909 Kick 1 JD Sm Metal Syn Swt Atk6 JD Sm Metal Cowbell Mute MG Zap 4a TR808 Kick MG Zap 5 HipHop OHH TR909 Ride 2 Syn Swt Atk1 Digi Loop 1 TR909 Kick 4 Syn Swt Atk3 TR909 OHH 2 Syn Swt Atk3 Cowbell MG Zap 6a WD Kick mf AnalogKick 2 TR909 R Crsh AnalogKickib Reverse Cym SynLow Atk2a WD Kick f TR909 Kick 2 TR909 Crash AnalogKick 4 AnalogKick 5 SynLow Atk2b WD K
85. 95 864 Santur Stack PLUCKED 87 70 96 865 Aerial Harp PLUCKED 87 70 97 866 Harpiness PLUCKED 87 70 98 867 Skydiver PLUCKED 87 70 99 868 TroubadorEns PLUCKED 87 70 100 869 PLUCKED 87 70 101 870 Koto PLUCKED 87 70 102 871 Monsoon PLUCKED 87 70 103 872 Bend Koto PLUCKED 87 70 104 873 LongDistance ETHNIC 87 70 105 874 Ambi Shaku ETHNIC 87 70 106 875 SC Lochscape ETHNIC 87 70 107 876 SC PipeDream ETHNIC 87 70 108 877 SC Far East ETHNIC 87 70 109 878 Banjo FRETTED 87 70 110 879 Timpani Low PERCUSSION 87 70 111 880 Timpani Roll PERCUSSION 87 70 112 881 Bass Drum PERCUSSION 87 70 113 882 Ambidextrous SOUND FX 87 70 114 883 SOUND FX 87 70 115 884 Mobile Phone SOUND FX 87 70 116 885 ElectroDisco BEAT amp GROOVE 87 70 117 886 Groove 007 BEAT amp GROOVE 87 70 118 887 In Da Groove BEAT amp GROOVE 87 70 119 888 Sweet 80s BEAT amp GROOVE 87 70 120 889 Autotrance BEAT amp GROOVE 87 70 121 890 Juno Pop BEAT amp GROOVE 87 70 122 891 Compusonic 1 BEAT amp GROOVE 87 70 123 892 Compusonic 2 BEAT amp GROOVE 87 70 124 893 80s Combo COMBINATION 87 70 125 894 Analog Days COMBINATION 87 70 126 895 Techno Craft COMBINATION 87 70 127 896 Lounge Kit COMBINATION 87 70 128 897 Piano 1 AC PIANO 2 0 1 898 Piano lw AC PIANO 2 899 European Pf AC PI
86. ANO 2 2 900 Piano 2 AC PIANO 2 0 2 901 Piano 2w AC PIANO 2 902 Piano 3 AC PIANO 2 0 3 903 Piano AC PIANO 2 904 Honky tonk AC PIANO 2 0 4 905 Honky tonk 2 AC PIANO 2 4 906 E Piano 1 EL PIANO 2 0 5 907 St Soft EP EL PIANO 2 908 FM SA EP EL PIANO 2 2 909 Wurly EL PIANO 2 3 910 E Piano 2 EL PIANO 2 0 6 911 Detuned EP 2 EL PIANO 2 912 St FM EP EL PIANO 2 2 913 EP Legend EL PIANO 2 3 914 EP Phase EL PIANO 2 4 915 Harpsichord KEYBOARDS 2 0 7 916 Coupled Hps KEYBOARDS 2 1 917 Harpsi w KEYBOARDS 2 2 918 Harpsi o KEYBOARDS 2 3 919 Clav KEYBOARDS 2 0 8 920 Pulse Clav KEYBOARDS 2 1 89 No Name Category MSB LSB PC 921 Celesta KEYBOARDS 121 0 9 922 Glockenspiel BELI 121 0 10 923 Music Box BELI 121 0 11 924 Vibraphone MALLET 121 0 12 925 Vibraphone w MALLET 121 1 926 Marimba MALLET 121 0 13 927 Marimba w MALLET 121 1 928 X
87. BOOM e 46 Each song saa waa te d e 33 Metronome a teo aa cata sales 22 Overall aki 15 Parietaria Mec E CER E 24 Volume balance between Backing and Keyboard 23 VOLUME knob 10 15 Window 16 WRITE an aaa na Aa 11 28 33 39 Information EGYPT Al Fanny Trading Office 9 EBN Hagar Al Askalany Street 1 Golf Heliopolis Cairo 11341 EGYPT TEL 022 417 1828 REUNION Maison FO YAM Marcel 25 Rue Jules Hermann Chaudron BP79 97 491 Ste Clotilde Cedex REUNION ISLAND TEL 0262 218 429 SOUTH AFRICA T O M S Sound amp Music Pty Ltd 2 ASTRON ROAD DENVER JOHANNESBURG ZA 2195 SOUTH AFRICA TEL 011 417 3400 Paul Bothner PTY Ltd Royal Cape Park Unit 24 Londonderry Road Ottery 7800 Cape Town SOUTH AFRICA TEL 021 799 4900 CHINA Roland Shanghai Electronics Co Ltd 5F No 1500 Pingliang Road Shanghai 200090 CHINA TEL 021 5580 0800 Roland Shanghai Electronics Co Ltd BEIJING OFFICE 10F No 18 3 Section Anhuaxili Chaoyang District Beijing 100011 CHINA TEL 010 6426 5050 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co Ltd Service Division 22 32 Pun Shan Street Tsuen Wan New Territories HONG KONG TEL 2415 0911 Parsons Music Ltd 8th Floor Railway Plaza 39 Chatham Road South T S T Kowloon HONG KONG TEL 2333 1863 INDIA
88. Bell BRIGHT PAD 121 1 1087 BRIGHT PAD 121 2 1088 Star Theme BRIGHT PAD 121 0 04 1089 Sitar PLUCKED 121 0 05 1090 Sitar 2 PLUCKED 121 1 1091 Banjo FRETTED 121 0 06 1092 Shamisen PLUCKED 121 0 07 1093 Koto PLUCKED 121 0 08 1094 Taisho Koto PLUCKED 121 1 1095 Kalimba PLUCKED 121 0 09 1096 Bagpipe ETHNIC 121 0 10 1097 Fiddle STRINGS 121 0 11 1098 Shanai ETHNIC 121 0 12 1099 Tinkle Bell BELL 121 0 13 1100 Agogo PERCUSSION 121 0 14 1101 Steel Drums MALLET 121 0 15 1102 Woodblock PERCUSSION 121 0 16 1103 Castanets PERCUSSION 121 1 1104 Taiko PERCUSSION 121 0 17 1105 Concert BD PERCUSSION 121 1 1106 Melo Tom 1 PERCUSSION 121 0 18 1107 Melo Tom 2 PERCUSSION 121 1 1108 Synth Drum PERCUSSION 121 0 19 1109 808 Tom PERCUSSION 121 1 1110 Elec Perc PERCUSSION 121 1 1111 Reverse PERCUSSION 121 0 20 1112 Gt FretNoise AC GUITAR 121 0 21 1113 Gt Cut Noise AC GUITAR 121 1 1114 String Slap AC GUITAR 121 2 1115 Breath Noise SYNTH FX 121 0 22 1116 Fl Key Click SYNTH FX 121 1 1117 Seashore SOUND FX 121 0 23 1118 Rain SOUND FX 121 1 1119 Thunder SOUND FX 121 2 1120 Wind SOUND FX 121 3 1121 Stream SOUND FX 121 4 1122 Bubble SOUND FX 121 5 1123 Bird SOUND FX 121 0 124 1124 Dog SOUND FX 121 1 1125 Horse Gallop SOUND FX 121 2 1126 Bird 2 SOUND FX 121 3 1127 Telephone 1 SOUND FX 121 0 125 1128 Telepho
89. C to your retailer the nearest Roland Service Center or adaptor s body Other AC adaptors may use a an authorized Roland distributor as listed on the information page different polarity or be designed for a different voltage so their use could result in damage malfunction or electric shock Never install the unit in any of the following sin Vaasa NB sch T E OEA locations Use only the attached power supply cord Also the Subject to temperature extremes e g direct sunlight in NN supplied power cord must not be used with any other an enclosed vehicle near a heating duct on top of device heatgenerating equipment or are Damp e g baths washrooms on wet floors or are Exposed to steam or smoke or are Do not excessively twist or bend the power cord nor place heavy objects on it Doing so can damage the cord producing severed elements and short circuits Damaged cords are fire and shock hazards Subject to salt exposure or are Humid or are Exposed to rain or are Dusty or sandy or are Subject to high levels of vibration and shakiness This unit either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speakers may be This unit should be used only with a rack or stand capable of producing sound levels that could cause tha
90. Chord Bass will be sounded drum percussion sounds that are assigned to the keyboard The root note of the chord you play will sound Octave rae Raises or lowers the pitch in steps Lower of one octave for Lower Tone ON The lowest note of the chord you play will sound 37 Performance Functions and Effects Editing a Tone Editing a Tone in detail You can edit the currently selected Tone including rhythm set Tones in more detail The Tone settings you edit are stored in the Performance p 36 1 Press MENU 2 Use 1I V 1to select Perform Tone Edit then press ENTER 3 Use lt q p gt to select the Upper or Lower Tone that you want to edit 4 Use 1 V 110 selecta parameter and turn the VALUE dial to adjust the value 5 When yov ve finished making settings press EXIT The Main screen will appear Tone Parameters Parameter Value Explanation Level 0 127 Adjusts the volume of the Tone Parameter Resonance Value 64 63 Explanation This boosts the sound in the region of the cutoff frequency adding a distinctive character to the sound Turn the knob toward the right to strengthen this character or toward the left to decrease it Attack Time 64 63 Adjusts the attack time the time from when you press a key until the sound reaches its full volume Turn the knob toward the right to lengthen the attack time or toward the left to
91. Cutoff f requency Filte Filter resonance level i 0 127 Increosing this volue will emphosize the esonance region neor the cutoff frequency Filter Gain 0 12 dB Amount of boost for the filter output Modulation Sw OFF ON On off switch for cyclic change How the cutoff frequency will be modulated TRI triangle wave TRI SQR SIN SQR square wave SAW1 SAW2 SIN sine wave SAW1 sawtooth wave upward Modulation SAW2 sawtooth wave downward Wave SAW1 SAW2 Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz Rate of modulation note Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation Speed at which the cutoff frequency will change Attack yer This is effective if Modulation Wave is SQR SAW1 or SAW2 Level 0 127 Output level 06 STEP FILTER This is a filter whose cutoff frequency can be modulated in steps You can specify the pattern by which the cutoff frequency will change Lin Step Filter L out Rin Step Filter R out Parameter Value Description Step 01 16 0 127 Cutoff frequency at each step Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz Rate of modulation note Attack 0 127 Speed at which the cutoff frequency changes between steps Filter type Frequency range that will pass through each filter Filter Type LPF BPF HPF LPF frequencies below the cutoff NOTCH BPF frequencies in the region of the cutoff HPF frequencies above the cutoff NOTCH frequencies other than the re gion of the cutoff Amount of attenuation per octave Filter Slope 12 24 36
92. D 87 70 17 786 Strings Pad SOFT PAD 87 70 18 787 R amp B SoftPad SOFT PAD 87 70 19 788 Reso Pad SOFT PAD 87 70 20 789 Phat Pad SOFT PAD 87 70 21 790 SC PhaserPad SOFT PAD 87 70 22 791 Mystic Str SOFT PAD 87 70 23 792 Glass Organ SOFT PAD 87 70 24 793 Wind Pad SOFT PAD 87 70 25 794 Combination SOFT PAD 87 70 26 795 HumanKindnes SOFT PAD 87 70 27 796 BeautyPad SOFT PAD 87 70 28 797 Atmospherics SOFT PAD 87 70 29 798 Terra Nostra SOFT PAD 87 70 30 799 OB Aaahs SOFT PAD 87 70 31 800 Vulcano Pad SOFT PAD 87 70 32 801 Cloud 9 SOFT PAD 87 70 33 802 Organic Pad SOFT PAD 87 70 34 803 Hum Pad SOFT PAD 87 70 35 804 Vox Pad SOFT PAD 87 70 36 805 Digital Aahs SOFT PAD 87 70 37 806 Tri 5th Pad SOFT PAD 87 70 38 807 SC MovinPad SOFT PAD 87 70 39 808 Seq Pad 1 SOFT PAD 87 70 40 809 Follow SOFT PAD 87 70 41 810 Consolament SOFT PAD 87 70 42 811 Spacious Pad SOFT PAD 87 70 43 812 JD Pop Pad SOFT PAD 87 70 44 813 JP 8 Phase SOFT PAD 87 70 45 814 Nu Epic Pad SOFT PAD 87 70 46 815 Forever SOFT PAD 87 70 47 816 Flange Dream SOFT PAD 87 70 48 817 Evolution X SOFT PAD 87 70 49 818 Heaven Pad SOFT PAD 87 70 50 819 Angelis Pad SOFT PAD 87 70 51 820 Juno 106 Str SOFT PAD 87 70 52 821 JupiterMoves SOFT PAD 87 70 53 822 Oceanic Pad SOFT PAD 87 70 54 823 Fairy s Song
93. D BEAM lorE tokyo colores CC71 Resonance Performanc Back e Package Scratch CO SW CC03 Speed Knob CC08 Balance Total Fader CC10 Panpot Cross Fader CC11 Expression About V LINK Parameter Value Explanation BPM syne sw CC64 Hold Clip CC65 Loop SW Portamento Assign Knob CC72 Release Fade ne sw CC73 Attack ud CC7A Cutoff i Used with ABSW CC81 General motion dive Tap SW CC83 General 8 129 Performanc Total CC85 e Package Select FX Select CC86 Play Pos CC91 Reverb ep CC92 Tremolo D BEAM StartPos Loop Et Geos Pos Layer ModeSel 94 Celeste Dissolve Used with Time the DV 7PR ColerCb 1 oe Ctrl Modulation ee COUTE CC71 Resonance Ctrl Brightness e CC7A Cutoff VFX1 Ctrl CC72 Release VFX2 Ctrl CC91 Reverb VFX3 Ctrl CC92 Tremolo VFX4 Ctrl CC93 Chorus Fade Ctrl CC10 Panpot On V LINK compatible devices such as the Edirol DV 7PR P 1 only Note Tx Channel A is used In motion dive tokyo Performance Package the Note Tx Channel corresponds as follows A The MIDI channel that controls section A B The MIDI channel that controls section B C The MIDI channel that controls the MIDI note plug in 51 52 Troubleshooting This section provides points to check and actions to take when the Prelude does not function as you expect Refer t
94. DISTORTION CHORUS p 79 30 3D FLANGER P 67 70 DISTORTION FLANGER 79 31 30 STEP FLANGER P 67 71 DISTORTION DELAY 79 32 2BAND CHORUS P 67 72 ENHANCER CHORUS 79 33 2BAND FLANGER P 68 73 ENHANCER FLANGER 79 34 2BAND STEP FLANGER P 68 74 ENHANCER DELAY P 80 DYNAMICS 8 types 75 CHORUS DELAY P 80 35 OVERDRIVE P 69 76 FLANGER DELAY P 80 36 DISTORTION P 69 77 CHORUS FLANGER P 81 37 VS OVERDRIVE P 69 PIANO 1 type 38 VS DISTORTION P 69 78 SYMPATHETIC RESO P 81 39 GUITAR AMP SIMULATOR P 69 40 COMPRESSOR P 70 41 LIMITER P 70 42 GATE P 70 56 About Note Some effect parameters such as Rate or Delay Time can be set in terms of a note value Such parameters have a num note switch that lets you specify whether you will set the value as a note value or as a numerical value If you want to set Rate Delay Time as a numerical value set the num note switch to Hz msec If you want to set it as a note value set the num note switch to NOTE Filter Tyre Manual Peak Sens Polarity NUM NOTE switch If the Rate is specified as a note value the modulation will be synchronized with the tempo when you play back SMF song data note 23 Sixty fourth note triplet 2 Sixty fourth note Thirty second note triplet Thirty second note Sixteenth note triplet Dotted thiry second note
95. Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation Resonance 0 127 Amount of feedback Mix 0 127 Level of the phase shifted sound Pan 164 63R Stereo location of the output sound Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Level 0 127 Output Level 61 EE INFINITE PHASER A phaser that continues raising lowering the frequency at which the sound is modulated Lin Infinite Phaser gt L out 7 Pan L R Rin gt R out Parameter Range Explanation Mode 1 2 3 4 oe values phaser effect Speed at which to raise or lower the frequency at which the sound Speed 2100 4199 is modulated upward downward Resonance 0 127 Amount of feedback Mix 0 127 volume of the phase shifted soun Pan L64 63R Panning of the output sound Low Gain 15 415 dB amm of boost cut for the low requency range High Goin 15 415 dB Amount of boost cut for the high requency range Level 0 127 Output volume RING This is an effect that applies amplitude modulation AM to the input signal producing bell like sounds You can also change the modulation frequency in response to changes in the volume of the sound sent into the effect Lin Ring Mod 2 Band EQ L out Rin Ring Mod 2 Band EQ R out Parameter Value Description Frequency 0 127 2 frequency at which modul
96. F ON Change transmission These messages are used to select Tones This specifies whether MIDI Clock messages will be transmitted Use Tx Clock this when you want a connected OFF ON external MIDI device to synchronize to the Prelude This specifies whether Start Stop Continue messages will be Tx StartStop transmitted OFF ON Song mode Start Stop Continue Style mode Start Stop This specifies whether Song Position Pointer messages will be transmitted to indicate the Tx Song Po currently playing pasiten i Song OFF ON sition mode If you don t want this message to be transmitted choose the Off setting This is valid only if SONG is lit Parameter Rx Sync Using MIDI Explanation This specifies how the Prelude will synchronize to an external MIDI device Synchronization is available if the MIDI OUT connector of your external MIDI device is connected to the Prelude s MIDI IN connector If you ve made the opposite connection refer to the owner s manual for your external device Value OFF ON Rx Pitch Bend This is an on off switch for Pitch Bend message reception These messages temporarily raise or lower the pitch of the keyboard mode Tone OFF ON Rx Modulation This is an on off switch for Modulation message reception These messages apply vibrato to the keyboard mode Tone control change CC 01 OFF ON Rx Program Change This is an on off switch for Progr
97. Gain LOW MIDDLE HIGH Amount of pre amp distortion Pre Amp Bass Tone of the bass mid treble fre Pre Amp quency range Middle 0 127 Middle cannot be set if Match Drive is selected as the Pre Pre Amp Treble Amp Type Pre Amp Tone for the ultra high frequency 0 127 resence range Turning this On produces o shorper and brighter sound Pre Amp Bright OFF ON This parameter applies to the JC 120 Clean Twin and BG Lead Pre Amp Types Determines whether the signal Speaker Sw OFF ON passes through the speaker ON or not OFF Speaker Type See the table right Type of speaker Adjusts the location of the mic that s capturing the sound of the speaker This can be adjusted in three Mic Setting 1 2 3 steps from 1 to 3 with the mic becoming more distant as the value increases Mic Level 0 127 Volume of the microphone Direct Level 0 127 Volume of the direct sound Pan L64 63R Stereo location of the output Level 0 127 Output level VS OVERDRIVE This is an overdrive that provides heavy distortion Lin gt L out 7 Pan L Y Pan R Rin gt R out Parameter Value Description Degree of distortion Drive aa Also changes the volume Tone 0 127 Sound quality of the Overdrive effect Amp Sw OFF ON Turns the Amp Simulator on off Type of guitar amp SMALL small amp SMALL BUILT IN 2 4 y BUILT IN single unit t
98. Kick 1 Dist Hit Conga Slip Op Cabasa Cut TR808 OHH 2 Euro Hit 2 Mix Kick 2 Narrow Hit 2 Conga Efx Tibet Cymbal 808 Maracas Wind Chime Mix Kick 4 MG Attack Conga Thumb Crotale TR808 Claves Timpani Roll Vint Snr 1 MG Zap 9 Noise OHH Slight Bell Triangle Mt Crotale Vint Snr 2 Mix Clap 3 Shaker 3 Wind Chime Triangle Op R8 Click Vint Snr 3 R8 Shaker Castanet Triangle 1 Narrow Hit 2 Metro Bell Vint Snr 4 Cabasa Down CR78 Beat Mild CanWave Euro Hit MC500 Beep 1 Noise CHH Cabasa Cut CR78 OHH Cheap Clap MG Zap 4 MC500 Beep 2 CR78 CHH MaxLow Kick1 CR78 CHH JD Plunk Scratch 1 Atmosphere Noise CHH 3 MaxLow Kick2 Lite OHH Syn Swt Atk2 MG Zap 1 Agogo Noise Noise OHH 2 Lo Bit Snr 1 CR78 Tamb DistGtr Nz 2 TR606 Snr 2 Car Slip Noise OHH 1 Dance CHH JD Vox Noise River Synth Saw Group Snap Heartbeat Wild Stick Guiro 2 Fast Bubble Digi Breath Laser Scratch 2 MC500 Beep 1 Metro Click Train Pass DigiSpectrum ConcertBD Scratch 5 MC500 Beep 2 Metro Bell LoFi Min Hit Shaker 3 AnalogKick 3 Scratch 1 Gospel Clap Wind Chime Pink Noise Conga 2H Sip Old Kick Scratch 4 TR606 Cym Crotale Agogo Noise Cajon 1 Reg Kick Scratch 6 China Cymbal Crash Cym1 p SynVox Nz 1 Vint Snr 3 TR909 Snr 4b Mobile Phone Rock Crash 2 TR909 Crash SynVox Nz 2 Door Creak 1 TR808 Snr 2 Sweep Bass 1 CR78 OHH CR78 OHH R8 Click Vint Phone Vint Snr 4 Sweep Bass 2 Concert Cym Rev Lite OHH Syn Swt Atk1 Door Creak 2 Light Snr 95 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 B 4 a
99. L V 1L 1 Use these buttons to move the cursor in the screen 18 EXIT and ENTER buttons Pressed to issue the Cancel EXIT or Execute ENTER commands in screens that prompt you to make such a selection You ll also use the ENTER button to access lists of Tones Performances Styles or Songs 19 MENU button This button takes you to the settings screen for various parameters p 45 20 REVERB button This button lets you make effect settings p 40 21 WRITE button Press this button to save various types of settings p 28 33 39 22 NUMERIC button You can input numerical values with the TONE SELECT buttons 37 when this button is lit p 16 KEYBOARD section 23 SPLIT button This button selects Split mode whereby the keyboard is divided into two regions allowing you to play separate sounds with the right and left hands p 19 24 DUAL button Switches the Prelude to Dual mode which enables performances with two separate Tones layered together Ip 19 25 KEY TOUCH button Press this button to make the keyboard s touch sensitivity lighter or heavier p 21 Panel Descriptions 26 V LINK button Switching this on lets you control external V LINK compatible video equipment p 50 27 OCTAVE buttons Use these buttons to raise or lower the pitch of the keyboard in one octave steps p 21 28 TRANSPOSE button These button allow you to transpose the Prelude up or dow
100. LD PEDAL jack 5 Ee 12 15 Hold Pedal Switch u n aa 39 Hold Pol rity z iie u Re e 46 27 Initializing USB memory ss 48 Input te ee eie e 28 INTRO ua nas Sua catechol 24 K Trans asrama mua aaah 22 KEY SCALE augu en UTOR ER MIR 20 REY TOUCH ee nn 11 21 Keybeard iMeg e u ia 19 L LCD CONTRAST knob 12 16 Legato Switch det 39 Level Adjust t rte eere 33 Loading User Datel e 48 Local Switch eee e 42 45 LOCK d 47 lock ONA AAA AA 17 LOWER MEX aa ede ote eoe det et 40 Lower Chorus Send sse 40 106 Lower MFX Reverb Send 40 Lower Source 41 lower Tone s usaba u Chiu Ou A eT t tenes 19 M MAIN a uw hy 24 M in sereen octo otto t iecit eee 16 31 Master Tune aya u 45 MELODY INTELLIGENCE 11 MELODY INTELLIGENCE 22 MENU ENORMI 11 45 Metronome esssesssee Hee eene 22 23 46 Metronome Level ee 22 Metronome Mode eee 22 Metronome Switch 22 MFX Multi effects 40 MID itera morer ha ei W
101. LO CHORUS This is a chorus effect with added Tremolo cyclic modulation of 29 3D CHORUS This applies a 3D effect to the chorus sound The chorus sound will be positioned 90 degrees left and 90 degrees right volume Lin L out Balance D 7 Balance W Tremolo Chorus Rin O R out Balance D Parameter Value Description Adjusts the delay time from the di Pre Delay 0 0 100 0 ms rect sound until the chorus sound is heard Chorus Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz note Modulation frequency of the cho rus effect Chorus Depth 0 127 Modulation depth of the chorus ef fect Tremolo Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz note Modulation frequency of the trem olo effect Tremolo Separation 0 127 Spread of the tremolo effect Tremolo Phase 0 180 deg Spread of the tremolo effect Volume balance between the di Balance D100 0W DO 100W rect sound 0 and the tremolo chorus sound W Level 0 127 Output Level SPACE D This is a multiple chorus that applies two phase modulation in stereo It gives no impression of modulation but produces a transparent chorus effect Parameter Value Description Type of filter OFF no filter is used LPF cuts the frequency range Filter Type REE above the Cutoft Freq HPF cuts the frequency range below the Cutoff Freq Cutoff Freq 200 8000 Hz Basic frequency of the filter Adjus
102. LS AR E EAE SJ T11363 2006 RUNS E BER LF X RANA A ED CR IP EAE DEAS STR HEE LE SJ T11363 2006 RE BE OR For EU Countries This product complies with the requirements of EMC Directive 2004 108 EC For the USA FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is sub
103. NG and USB MEMORY PLAYER What is a Music Style p 24 A Music Style is a musical template used by a Backing The Prelude contains a variety of Music Styles such as rock pop Latin and jazz You can also add Style data by using a USB memory p 48 You can use the included StyleConverter software to create Styles on your computer What is a Song p 26 The Prelude contains a 16 track MIDI song sequencer which you can use to record the music you play You can add a Backing to the performance you play on the keyboard and save the result as a Song You can also import Song data from a USB memory What is a USB Memory Player p 30 This plays audio files or SMF data that has been stored in USB memory You can perform on the Prelude accompanied by backing from an audio file or SMF About Memory Performance settings are stored in what is referred to as memory There are three kind of memory temporary rewritable and non rewritable Temporary Preset Performance Performance Import and export System tt Playlist Sound Playlist Song file USB Memory Temporary memory Temporary area This area holds the data of the Performance you ve selected using the front panel buttons and also holds the playlist you edited on the Prelude When you pl
104. OP RHYTHM 86 64 8 171 House Kit RHYTHM 86 64 9 172 Nu Technica RHYTHM 86 64 20 173 Machine Kit2 RHYTHM 86 64 21 174 ArtificalKit RHYTHM 86 64 22 175 Noise Kit RHYTHM 86 64 23 176 Kick Menu RHYTHM 86 64 24 177 Snare Menu RHYTHM 86 64 25 178 Snr Rim Menu RHYTHM 86 64 26 179 HiHat Menu RHYTHM 86 64 27 180 Tom Menu RHYTHM 86 64 28 181 Clp amp Cym amp Hit RHYTHM 86 64 29 182 FX SFX Menu RHYTHM 86 64 30 183 Percussion RHYTHM 86 64 31 184 Scrh amp Voi amp Wld RHYTHM 86 64 32 185 GM2 STANDARD RHYTHM 20 0 1 186 GM2 ROOM RHYTHM 20 0 9 187 GM2 POWER RHYTHM 20 0 17 188 GM2 ELECTRIC RHYTHM 20 0 25 189 GM2 ANALOG RHYTHM 20 0 26 190 GM2 JAZZ RHYTHM 20 0 33 191 GM2 BRUSH RHYTHM 20 0 41 192 2 ORCHSTRA RHYTHM 20 0 49 193 GM2 SFX RHYTHM 20 0 57 No Name Category MSB LSB PC 1075 Metal Pad BRIGHT PAD 121 0 94 1076 Halo Pad BRIGHT PAD 121 0 95 1077 Sweep Pad SOFT PAD 121 0 96 1078 Ice Rain OTHER SYNTH 121 0 97 1079 Soundtrack SOFT PAD 121 0 98 1080 Crystal BELL 121 0 99 1081 Syn Mallet BELL 121 1 1082 Atmosphere AC GUITAR 121 0 00 1083 Brightness OTHER SYNTH 121 0 01 1084 Goblin PULSATING 121 0 02 1085 Echo Drops BRIGHT PAD 121 0 03 1086 Echo
105. Op Conga Lo Op Conga Lo Op Conga 2L Op Conga Lo Op Conga Lo Op 65 Timbare 4 Timbale Hi Timbale 1 Timbare 4 Timbale Hi Timbale Hi _ Timbare 3 Timbale Low Timbale 2 Timbare 3 Timbale Low Timbale Low 67 Agogo 2 Hi Mild Agogo H Agogo 2 Hi Agogo 2 Hi Agogo Bell H Mild Agogo H EE Agogo 2 Low Mild Agogo L Agogo 2 Low Agogo 2 Low Agogo Bell L Mild Agogo L 69 Cabasa 2 Cabasa Up Cabasa 2 Cabasa 2 Cabasa Up Cabasa Up EM Shaker 2 Maracas Shaker 2 Shaker 1 Maracas Maracas 71 Whistle Shrt Whistle Shrt Whistle Shrt Whistle Shrt Whistle Shrt Whistle Shrt C572 Whistle Long Whistle Long Whistle Whistle Long Whistle Long Whistle Long 7 Guiro 2 Up Guiro Short Guiro 2 Up Guiro 2 Up Guiro Short Guiro Short 74 Guiro 2 Down Guiro Long Guiro Long Guiro 2 Down Guiro Long Guiro Long 75 Claves 2 Claves Claves 2 Claves 2 Claves Claves 76 Wood Block2H Wood Block H Wood Block2H Wood Block2H Wood Block H Wood Block H 77 Wood Block2L Wood Block L Wood Block2L Wood Block2L Wood Block L Wood Block L Cuica 2 Low Cuica Mute Cuica 2 Low Cuica 2 Low Cuica Mute Cuica Mute 79 Cuica 2 Hi Cuica Open Cuica 2 Hi Cuica 2 Hi Cuica Open Cuica Open EW Triangle Mt Triangle Mt Triangle Mt Triangle Mt Triangle Mt Triangle Mt 81 Triangle Op Triangle Op Triangle Op Triangle Op Triangle Op Triangle Op TEM Cabasa2 Cut Cabasa Cut Cabasa2 Cut Cabasa2 Cut Cabasa Cut Cabasa Cut 83 DigiSpectrum DigiSpectrum DigiSpectrum DigiSpectrum Castanet DigiSpectrum C684 Wind Chime Wind Chime W
106. P O Box 16 5857 Beirut LEBANON TEL 01 20 1441 OMAN TALENTZ CENTRE L L C Malatan House No 1 Al Noor Street Ruwi SULTANATE OF OMAN TEL 2478 3443 QATAR Al Emadi Co Badie Studio amp Stores P O Box 62 Doha QATAR TEL 4423 554 SAUDI ARABIA aDawliah Universal Electronics APL Behind Pizza Inn Prince Turkey Street aDawliah Building PO BOX 2154 Alkhobar 31952 SAUDI ARABIA TEL 03 8643601 SYRIA Technical Light amp Sound Center PO BOX 13520 BLDG No 17 ABDUL WAHAB KANAWATI ST RAWDA DAMASCUS SYRIA TEL 011 223 5384 TURKEY ZUHAL DIS TICARET A S Galip Dede Cad No 37 Beyoglu Istanbul TURKEY TEL 0212 249 85 10 U A E Zak Electronics amp Musical Instruments Co L L C Zabeel Road Al Sherooq Bldg No 14 Ground Floor Dubai U A E TEL 04 3360715 NORTH AMERICA CANADA Roland Canada Ltd Head Office 5480 Parkwood Way Richmond B C V6V 2M4 CANADA TEL 604 270 6626 Roland Canada Ltd Toronto Office 170 Admiral Boulevard Mississauga On L5T 2N6 CANADA TEL 905 362 9707 U S A Roland Corporation U S 5100 S Eastern Avenue Los Angeles CA 90040 2938 U S A TEL 323 890 3700 As of Jan 1 2009 ROLAND 109 110 For EU Countries e e ASSL BRAS P8 p E 0 2007 3 H1 A This symbol indicates that in EU countries this product must be collected separately from household waste as def
107. PAD 87 69 89 653 Magic Wave SYNTH FX 87 69 13 730 80s Str BRIGHT PAD 87 69 90 654 Shangri la SYNTH FX 87 69 14 731 PhaseStrings BRIGHT PAD 87 69 91 655 CerealKiller SYNTH FX 87 69 15 732 Voyager BRIGHT PAD 87 69 92 656 Cosmic Drops SYNTH FX 87 69 16 733 Cosmic Rays BRIGHT PAD 87 69 93 657 Space Echo SYNTH FX 87 69 17 734 Stringship BRIGHT PAD 87 69 94 658 Robot Sci Fi SYNTH FX 87 69 18 735 Fat Stacks BRIGHT PAD 87 69 95 659 Stacc Heaven OTHER SYNTH 87 69 19 736 Strings R Us BRIGHT PAD 87 69 96 660 Juno Poly OTHER SYNTH 87 69 20 737 Electric Pad BRIGHT PAD 87 69 97 661 DigitalDream OTHER SYNTH 87 69 21 738 Neo RS 202 BRIGHT PAD 87 69 98 662 Jucy Saw OTHER SYNTH 87 69 22 739 OB Rezo Pad BRIGHT PAD 87 69 99 663 Cue Tip OTHER SYNTH 87 69 23 740 Synthi Ens BRIGHT PAD 87 69 100 664 Waspy Synth OTHER SYNTH 87 69 24 741 Giant Sweep BRIGHT PAD 87 69 101 665 TB Sequence OTHER SYNTH 87 69 25 742 Mod Dare BRIGHT PAD 87 69 102 666 Europe Xpres OTHER SYNTH 87 69 26 743 Cell Space BRIGHT PAD 87 69 103 667 Squeepy OTHER SYNTH 87 69 27 744 Digi Swell BRIGHT PAD 87 69 104 668 DOC Stack OTHER SYNTH 87 69 28 745 Sonic Surfer BRIGHT PAD 87 69 105 669 Sweep Lead OTHER SYNTH 87 69 29 746 New Year Day BRIGHT PAD 87 69 106 670 805 Saws 1 OTHER SYNTH 87 69 30 747 Polar Morn BRIGHT PAD
108. PAN DELAY This effect has four delays Balance D Lin Balance D Stereo location of each delay Parameter Value Description Delay 1 4 Time 0 2600 ms Adjusts the time until the delay sound is note heard Delay 1 Adjusts the amount of the delay sound y 98 98 that s fed back into the effect Negative Feedback bu settings invert the phase Adjusts the frequency above which sound HF Dam 200 8000 Hz fed back to the effect is filtered out If you P BYPASS do not want to filler out any high frequen cies set this parameter to BYPASS Delay 1 4 Level 0 127 Volume of each delay Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low frequency range High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high frequency range Balance D100 0W Volume balance between the direct sound DO 100W D and the delay sound W Level 0 127 Output level MULTI TAP DELAY This effect provides four delays Each of the Delay Time parameters can be set to a note length based on the selected tempo You can also set the panning and level of each delay sound Lin Balance D Parameter Value Description Delay 1 4 Time 0 2600 ms Adjusts the time until Delays 1 4 are note heard Delay 1 Adjusts the amount of the delay sound F k 98 98 that s fed back into the effect Negative eedbac settings invert the phase Adjusts the frequency above which sound HF Dam 200 8000 Hz fed
109. R909 Clap 1 DR660 Snr Vint Snr 4a Short Snr2 GoodOld Snr2 Jngl pktSnr2 TR909 Snr 4a Reg F Tom p TR909 Tom L TR808 Tom 1 Lo Bit Snr 1 MG Attack Sharp L Tom2 Lo Bit CHH 2 HipHop CHH 2 TR606 CHH 2 Noise CHH TR808 CHH 1 TR909 CHH 1 Reg F Tom f Deep Tom L Reg F Tom Jazz Snr MG Attack Sharp L Tom1 Lo Bit CHH 4 Lo Bit PHH TR909 CHH 2 Hip PHH TR808 PHH TR909 PHH 1 Reg L Tom TR909 Tom M TR808 Tom 2 Lo Bit Snr 2 MG Blip Sharp M Tom Lo Bit OHH 2 Lo Bit OHH 2 Lo Bit OHH 2 Reg OHH TR808 OHH 1 TR909 OHH 2 Reg L TomFlm Deep Tom M Reg M Tom Vint Snr 2 MG Blip Sharp M Tom Reg H Tom TR909 Tom H TR808 Tom 3 WD Snr Beam HiQ Sharp H Tom Crash Cym 1 Crash Cym1 p Rock Crash 1 TR808 Cym 1 TR606 Cym 2a TR909 Crash Reg H TomFlm Deep Tom H Reg H Tom GoodOld Snr6 Beam HiQ Sharp H Tom Lo Bit OHH 1 Rock Crash 1 Splash Cym TR606 Cym 2 Lo Bit OHH1a TR909 Ride TR606 Cym 2 Rock Rd Edge Rock Rd Edge White Noise TR606 Cym 2 China Cymbal Jazz Ride 1 China Cymbal Concert Cym Bright Form Lo Bit OHH1b Rock Rd Edge Tamborine 1 Snap Cheap Clap CR78 Tamb CR78 Tamb 1 Tamborine 3 TR606 OHH TR808 Conga2 Snap SBF Hrd Ld 1 TR606 Cym 2b Crash Cym1 p Vibraslap Vint Snr 4 Lo Bit Snr 2 JD Sm Metal JD Sm Metal Cowbell Mix Kick 2 TR808Cowbell Wood Block TR808 Cym 2 Lo Bit OHH1c Rock Crash 2 Hip PHH Guiro Long Shaku Noise Syn Swt Atk3 Syn Swt Atk3 Vibraslap Mix Kick 2 Guiro 2 Syn Hrd Atk1 TR909 Kick4a AnalogKick 6 TR606 Cym 2 Rough Kick Guiro 1 JD MetalWind TR909 Kick4b 70 s Kick 2 Bongo Lo Op Dry Stick Sh
110. Roland PRELUDE Music Keyboard Owner s Manual Before using this unit carefully read the sections entitled Using the unit safely p 3 and Important notes p 5 These sections provide important information concerning the proper operation of the unit Additionally in order to feel assured that you have gained a good grasp of every feature provided by your new unit this owner s manual should be read in its entirety The manual should be saved and kept on hand as a convenient reference Operating buttons are enclosed by square brackets e g ENTER Reference pages are indicated by p The following symbols are used This indicates an important note be sure to read it This indicates a memo regarding the setting or function read it as desired This indicates a useful hint for operation read it as necessary This indicates information for your reference read it as necessary This indicates an explanation of a term read it as necessary The explanations in this manual include illustrations that depict what should typically be shown by the display Note however that your unit may incorporate a newer enhanced version of the system e g includes newer sounds so what you actually see in the display may not always match what appears in the manual Copyright 2009 ROLAND EUROPE Spa All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduce
111. S SYNTH FX 87 68 22 711 Ice Palace OTHER SYNTH 87 69 71 635 WaitnOutside SYNTH FX 87 68 23 712 Story Harp OTHER SYNTH 87 69 72 636 Breath Echo SYNTH FX 87 68 24 713 LostParadise OTHER SYNTH 87 69 73 637 SoundStrange SYNTH FX 87 68 25 714 Magnetic 5th OTHER SYNTH 87 69 74 638 Cosmic Pulse SYNTH FX 87 68 26 715 DigimaX OTHER SYNTH 87 69 75 639 Faked Piano SYNTH FX 87 68 27 716 Exhale OTHER SYNTH 87 69 76 640 SC Crystal SYNTH FX 87 68 28 717 OTHER SYNTH 87 69 77 641 ResoSweep Dn SYNTH FX 87 69 1 718 Saw Keystep OTHER SYNTH 87 69 78 642 Zap amp C4 SYNTH FX 87 69 2 719 4mant Cycle OTHER SYNTH 87 69 79 643 PolySweep Nz SYNTH FX 87 69 3 720 Modular OTHER SYNTH 87 69 80 644 Strange Land SYNTH FX 87 69 4 721 Angel Pipes OTHER SYNTH 87 69 81 645 S amp H Voc SYNTH FX 87 69 5 722 Wired Synth OTHER SYNTH 87 69 82 646 12th Planet SYNTH FX 87 69 6 723 Analog Dream OTHER SYNTH 87 69 83 647 Scare SYNTH FX 87 69 7 724 DCO Bell Pad OTHER SYNTH 87 69 84 648 Hillside SYNTH FX 87 69 8 725 Cell Fanta OTHER SYNTH 87 69 85 649 Mod Scanner SYNTH FX 87 69 9 726 Juno 5th OTHER SYNTH 87 69 86 650 SoundOnSound SYNTH FX 87 69 10 727 DoubleBubble OTHER SYNTH 87 69 87 651 Gasp SYNTH FX 87 69 11 728 Cell Comb BRIGHT PAD 87 69 88 652 ResoSweep Up SYNTH FX 87 69 12 729 Super SynStr BRIGHT
112. SF Rim mf WD CStk mf Noise OHH 2 SF H Tom ff Philly Hit Crash Seq SF Rim f WDCStkf RRFTFImff 1 Gun Shot SF Rim ff LDCStkmf SFLTFImff Siren Light Snr ff LDCStkf SFMTFlImf Train Pass Click Snr p TYCStkmf SFHTFImp Airplane Click Snr ff TYCSKkf SFHTFimf Laugh Jazz Snr mf SfCrsStk p SF HT Fim ff Scream Jazz Snr f SfCrsStk f Punch Jazz Rim p Lo Bit Stk 1 Heartbeat Soft Jz Roll Lo Bit Stk 2 Footsteps Dry Stick 1 Machine Gun Dry Stick 2 Laser Dry Stick3 wanes ma Thunder Lp R8 Comp Rim Metro Bell oo TR909 Rim Metro Click TR808 Rim 97 C2136 ES E 4 a F x ES C3 a r a BB 4 o N o g x I N 5 A o YE C6 g a C7 103 98 1183 1184 Percussion Scrh amp Voi amp Wld Cowbell Mute Cowbell2 Lng Cowbell2 Edg Cowbe
113. SOFT PAD 87 70 55 824 Borealis SOFT PAD 87 70 56 825 JX Warm Pad SOFT PAD 87 70 57 826 Analog Bgrnd SOFT PAD 87 70 58 827 Choir Aahs 1 VOX 87 70 59 828 Choir Aahs 2 VOX 87 70 60 829 ChoirOoh Aft VOX 87 70 61 830 Angels Choir VOX 87 70 62 831 Angelique VOX 87 70 63 832 Gospel Oohs VOX 87 70 64 833 Choir amp Str VOX 87 70 65 834 Aah Vox VOX 87 70 66 835 Synvox VOX 87 70 67 836 Uhmmm VOX 87 70 68 837 Morning Star VOX 87 70 69 838 Syn Opera VOX 87 70 70 839 BeautifulOne VOX 87 70 71 840 Ooze VOX 87 70 72 841 Aerial Choir VOX 87 70 73 842 3D Vox VOX 87 70 74 843 Film Cue VOX 87 70 75 No Name Category MSB LSB PC 844 Paradise VOX 87 70 76 845 Sad ceremony VOX 87 70 77 846 Lost Voices VOX 87 70 78 847 Jazz Doos VOX 87 70 79 848 Beat Vox VOX 87 70 80 849 Talk 2 Me VOX 87 70 8l 850 FM Vox VOX 87 70 82 851 Let s Talk VOX 87 70 83 852 Nice Kalimba PLUCKED 87 70 84 853 Quiet River PLUCKED 87 70 85 854 Teky Drop PLUCKED 87 70 86 855 Pat is away PLUCKED 87 70 87 856 SC Sitar 1 PLUCKED 87 70 88 857 SC Sitar 2 PLUCKED 87 70 89 858 Sitar on C PLUCKED 87 70 90 859 Sitar Baby PLUCKED 87 70 91 860 Elec Sitar PLUCKED 87 70 92 861 Neo Sitar PLUCKED 87 70 93 862 SaraswatiRvr PLUCKED 87 70 94 863 Bosporus PLUCKED 87 70
114. Sound Module 43 Connecting to a Computer via the USB MIDI Connect eis 44 If connection to your computer is unsuccessful AA Making the Settings for the USB Driver 44 System Settings 45 How to Make System Settings MENUJ 45 System 45 Viewing Information about Prelude System Version Info Screens ai 47 Using USB Memory 48 Initializing USB Memory USB Memory Format 48 Saving User Data to USB Memory Backup 48 Loading User Data Saved on USB Memory Import 48 Deleting user data that you loaded 49 Data Structure in USB 49 Importing Data Saved in USB Memory USB IMPORT 49 About V LINK 50 How to Use the V LINK V LINK 50 V LINK Settings V LINK 50 Appendices 23 53 Error Messqges 55 ECCI IST eta cae eee 56 Multi Effects Parameters sse 56 Chorus Parameters l L usu Su 82 Reverb Parameters wwwwwwwmwimawm mimi 83 TORI SE 84 Rhythm Set Lisf
115. T The Main screen will appear LOWER MFX UPPER MFX CHORUS REVERB See Reverb Parameters p 83 Page EFFECT SOURCE Parameter Upper MFX Source Explanation Specifies the MFX settings that will be used for the Upper Part If you choose PERFORM the MFX settings of the Performance will be used If you choose UPPER TONE the Upper MFX settings of the Tone will be used Value PERFORM UPPER TONE Lower MFX Source Specifies the MFX settings that will be used for the Lower Part If you choose PERFORM the MFX settings of the Performance will be used If you choose LOWER TONE the Lower MFX settings of the Tone will be used PERFORM LOWER TONE Performance Functions and Effects 41 Using MIDI The Prelude can transmit and receive performance data when connected to an external MIDI device which enables the two devices to control each other s performance For example one device can play or switch sounds on the other device y TERM MIDI stands for Musical Instrument Digital Interface It is a universal standard for exchanging musical performance data among electronic musical instruments and computers The Prelude s MIDI connectors allow it to transmit performance data to and receive such data from other devices You can use the Prelude in a wide range of ways by connecting external devices to these connectors Connection ex
116. T R L MONO jacks The Prelude is fitted with the finest amplification system Roland has ever developed for its arranger keyboards You therefore may not need to connect it to an external amplification system These jacks output the audio signal to the connected mixer amplifier system in stereo For mono output use the L jack p 15 7 USB MIDI port Use a USB cable to connect the Prelude to your computer via this connector p 48 8 USB MEMORY port Connect a USB memory here and use the Prelude to play back files songs that have been stored on USB memory You can also back up data to USB memory 9 DC IN jack Connect the included AC adaptor here p 14 10 POWER switch This turns the power on off p 15 11 Cord hook Use this to secure the AC adaptor cord p 14 Introduction About the Prelude What is a Performance p 36 A Performance is a group of settings that specifies the Tone and Style the keyboard mode and various other parameters What is a Tone p 20 On the Prelude each of the sounds you normally play is called a Tone If we use the analogy of an orchestra a Tone corresponds to an instrument played by one of the musicians Tone settings such as those for effects and filters are stored in the Performance What is Backing p 23 Backing refers to the automatic accompaniment functionality of the Prelude There are three types of backing you can choose from STYLE SO
117. TR808 OHH 2 Wind Chime Wind Chime Dist Chord 1 Reg H Tom 2 Wind Chime 808 Maracas SprgDrm Hit Dist Chord 1 Dist Chord 2 Jazz Cymbal Tibet Cymbal TR808 Claves Crotale Dist Chord 2 Dist Chord 3 Reg H TomFlm Vibraslap Triangle Mt R8 Click Dist Chord 3 Dist Chord 4 Jazz Ride 2 Crotale Triangle Op Metro Bell Dist Chord 4 Dist Chord 5 China Cym 2 Applause Narrow Hit 2 DR202 Beep Dist Chord 5 Dist Chord 6 Cajon 1 TubulrBel F TR808 Cym1 Reverse Cym Rock CHH 2 Rock CHH 2 Cajon 2 TubulrBel F MG Zap 4 Xylo Seq Cowbell 2a Dist Chord 7 Cajon 3 TubulrBel G Scratch 1 Vinyl Noise Rock CHH 1 DistGtr Nz 1 Vint Snr 2 TubulrBel G MG Zap 1 Mobile Phone Cowbell 2b DistGtr Nz 2 Shaker 3 TubulrBel A TR606 Snr 2 Group Snap Rock OHH DistGtr Nz 3 WD Rim f TubulrBel As Synth Saw Laser Fng EB2 Sid JD Switch Mix Kick 1 TubulrBel B Digi Breath Siren Cajon 3 Cajon 3 Mix Kick 2 TubulrBel C TR808 Cym2 AnalogKick 3 Cajon 2 Cajon 2 Mix Kick 3 TubulrBel C TR808 1 Old Kick 2 Cajon 1 Cajon 1 Mix Kick 4 TubulrBel D TR808 Conga2 Reg Kick Gospel Clap Real Clap Mix Kick 5 TubulrBel Dit Cajon 1 TR909 Snr 4 Rock Crash 2 Gospel Clap Mix Clap 1 TubulrBel E Vint Snr 3 TR808 Snr 2 Rock Rd Cup Tibet Cymbal Wind Chime TubulrBel f Door Creak Short Snr1 Club FinSnap Tamborine 1 Tibet Cymbal Church Bell1 Vint Phone Vint Snr 4 TR909 Snr 6 Tamborine 2 Crotale Church Bell2 Door Creak C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 ES E 4 a F x F3 a
118. Trem EP ELPIANO 87 64 35 110 Bell Monitor BEL 87 64 110 36 SC Phase EP ELPIANO 87 64 36 111 TubyRuesday BEL 87 64 111 37 PhaseEPLayer ELPIANO 87 64 37 112 Vibrations MALLET 87 64 112 38 SC E Piano ELPIANO 87 64 38 113 SC Vibe MALLET 87 64 113 39 StageEP Trem ELPIANO 87 64 39 114 Ringy Vibes MALLET 87 64 114 40 Back2the60s ELPIANO 87 64 40 115 Airie Vibez MALLET 87 64 115 A1 Stage EP ELPIANO 87 64 41 116 SC Marimba MALLET 87 64 116 42 Stage Phazer ELPIANO 87 64 42 117 FM Wood MALLET 87 64 117 43 StageCabinet ELPIANO 87 64 43 118 SC Xylo MALLET 87 64 118 Ai SETS EP EL PIANO 97 Per AA 119 Ethno Keys MALLET 87 64 119 45 LEO EP ELPIANO 87 64 45 120 Synergy MALLET 87 64 120 46 lonesomeRoad ELPIANO 87 64 46 121 Icy Keys MALLET 87 64 121 47 Age n Tines ELPIANO 87 64 47 122 Steel Drums MALLET 87 64 122 48 Brill TremEP ELPIANO Sz 24l 48 123 50 SteelDrms MALLET 87 64 123 49 Crystal EP EL PIANO 87 64 49 124 Xylosizer MALLET 87 64 124 50 Vintage Tine EL PIANO 87 64 50 125 Toy Box MALLET 87 64 125 51 Celestial EP ELPIANO 87 64 51 126 AirPluck MALLET 87 64 126 52 Psycho EP ELPIANO 87 64 52 127 HardRockORGI ORGAN 87 64 127 53 Sig phsr ELPIANO 87 64 53 128 HardRockORG2 ORGAN 87 64 128 54 Dreaming EP ELPIANO 87 64 54 129 SuperDistORG ORGAN 87 65 55 Balladeer EL PIANO 87 64
119. a Hi 51 Conga Sip Op Conga Lo Sip Conga Hi Mt TR808 Snr 2 Conga Hi Conga Hi Op Conga Hi Op Conga Hi Op Conga Hi Op TR808 Clap 2 Conga Lo Conga Lo Op Conga Lo Op Conga Lo Op Conga Lo Op TR808 Snr 4 Timbale Hi Timbale Hi Timbale Hi Timbale Hi Timbale Hi TR808 Tom L Timbale Low Timbale Low Timbale Low Timbale Low Timbale Low TR808 CHH 1 Cowbell Hi Agogo Bell H Agogo Bell H Agogo Bell H Agogo Bell H TR808 Tom L Cowbell Low Agogo Bell L Agogo Bell L Agogo Bell L Agogo Bell L TR808 CHH 2 Cabasa Cabasa Up Cabasa Up Cabasa Up Cabasa Up TR808 Tom M Shaker Maracas Maracas Maracas Maracas TR808 OHH 1 Noise OHH 2 Whistle Shrt Whistle Shrt Jazz Kick 1 Whistle Shrt TR808 Tom M Scratch 5 Whistle Long Whistle Long Jazz Kick 2 Whistle Long TR808 Tom H Syn Low Atk2 Guiro Short Guiro Short Hard Stick Guiro Short TR808Cowbell MG Zap 3 Guiro Long Guiro Long Jazz Rim Guiro Long TR808 Tom H Syn Swt Atk1 Claves Claves Sft Snr Gst Claves TR606 Cym Syn Swt Atk4 Wood Block H Wood Block H Jazz Snr Wood Block H TR606 OHH 1 Bongo Hi 51 Wood Block L Wood Block L Reg F Tom 2 Wood Block L TR606 OHH 2 Noise OHH Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Reg CHH 1 Cuica Mute CR78 Tamb 2 Noise CHH Cuica Open Cuica Open Reg L Tom 2 Cuica Open CR78 OHH 1 Triangle 1 Triangle Mt Triangle Mt Reg CHH 2 Triangle Mt Cowbell Mute Triangle 2 Triangle Op Triangle Op Reg M Tom 2 Triangle Op CR78 OHH 2 Cajon 1 Cabasa Cut Cabasa Cut Reg OHH Cabasa Cut Syn Swt Atk5 Cajon 3 DigiSpectrum Wind Chime Reg M TomFlm Finger Snap
120. a es 42 46 MIDI Channels ete tesis 42 MIDI Implementation Chart aa 104 MIDI OUT IN connectors a 12 MIDI Parameters te quan as end ees 42 MIDERX Swilchi iu apa es 43 MIDI Sound Module ii 43 MIDI Tx Switch a a aa a 43 Minus One cel Stas one ie Ahaha Bie 32 Minus One function a 30 MINUS ONE CENTER CANCEL 30 32 Mix recording ia aun o 28 Modulation e hawa aaa 36 Mono Poly De eee 38 Multi Effects Parameters 56 Music Style Style see 13 25 MUTE atau n bla ices uate fp Mah etn 25 Dn c EE 27 30 N NUMERIC a Sto at Laer de 11 16 OCTAVE erect 11 21 Octave Lower I eem nnne 37 st occisos cue naya masqa 21 Octdve Upper den URS IURI as 37 ONE TOUGH Pee ttt WAWA 11 26 One Touch function a 26 OUTPUT R L MONO jacks sss 12 Output Select une eene ee ettet 40 P 38 Par t T6 level 33 Balance mc tee 24 PART VIEW u 10 24 27 28 Pedal 15 36 Pedal Assign yaaa hs 45 Pedal Pol rity i 2 am 46 Pedal switch
121. able is not included If you need to obtain one ask the dealer where you purchased the Prelude Switch on power to the Prelude before you start up the MIDI application on your computer Don t turn the Prelude s power on off while your MIDI application is running Making the Settings for the USB Driver Specify the USB driver you want to use and then install the driver Press MENU 2 Use V to select System then press ENTER 3 Use lt q p gt 1 to select SYSTEM GENERAL page 4 Use 1I V 1 to select USB Driver 5 Turn the VALUE dial to select the driver An information message appears Value Explanation VENDER Select this if you use the supplied driver GENERIC Select this if you use a generic USB driver included with the OS 6 Press EXIT 7 Turn the power off and then on again 44 System Settings Settings that affect the entire operating environment of the Prelude such as tuning and MIDI message reception are referred to as system settings How to Make System Settings MENU Press MENU Use A 11 V to select System then press ENTER Use p gt to select a page and use 1L V ito select the parameter that you want to edit For details refer to System Parameters below Turn the VALUE dial to edit the value When yov re finished making system settings press EXIT The display briefly shows the Syste
122. acks is to be heard through speakers set this parameter to SPEAKER If the sound is to be heard through headphones set it to PHONES This will ensure that the optimal 3D effect will be heard If this parameter is not set correctly the full 3D effect may not appear 57 EQUALIZER This is a four band stereo equalizer low mid x 2 high Lin 4 Band EQ L out Rin 4 Band EQ R out Parameter Value Description Low Freq 200 400 Hz Frequency of the low range Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range Mid Freq 200 8000 Hz Frequency of the middle range 1 Mid1 Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the middle range 1 Width of the middle range 1 Q 0 5 1 0 2 0 4 0 8 0 Seta higher value for Q to narrow the range to be affect ed Mid2 Freq 200 8000 Hz Frequency of the middle range 2 Mid2 Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the middle range 2 Width of the middle range 2 05 10 20 40 80 fanow ihe range tobe affect ed High Freq 2000 4000 8000 Hz Frequency of the high range High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Level 0 127 Output Level SPECTRUM This is a stereo spectrum Spectrum is a type of filter which modifies the timbre by boosting or cutting the level at specific frequencies Lin Spectrum L out Rin Spectrum R out Parameter Value Description Band1 250Hz Band2 500Hz Band3 1000Hz Band4 1250Hz
123. aker 3 Maracas TR808 Rim R8 Comp Rim Bongo Hi Op GoodOld Snr5 Noise CHH Cabasa Up TR808 Snr 2 Pocket Snr Conga Hi Mt R8 Clap Cabasa 2 Cabasa Down TR808 Clap 2 TR909 Clap 2 Conga Hi Op Jngl pkt Snr Vibraslap Cabasa Cut TR808 Snr 4 Vint Snr 4 Conga Lo Op TR808 Tom Mix Kick 2 Tamborine 1 TR808 Tom 4 TR606 Tom L Conga Efx Noise CHH 1 Dist Snr Tamborine 2 TR808 CHH 1 Dance CHH Shaker 3 TR808 Tom Sweep Bass Tamborine 1 TR808 Tom 3 TR606 Tom L Shaker 2 Noise CHH 2 Short Snr1 Triangle Mt TR808 CHH 2 Lo Bit CHH 1 CR78 Beat TR606 Tom L1 CR78 CHH Triangle Op TR808 Tom 2 TR606 Tom M Cabasa Cut 1 Lo Bit OHH 2 Shaker 2 Xylo Seq TR808 OHH 1 Reg OHH Cabasa Cut 2 TR606 Tom L2 CR78 Tamb Philly Hit TR808 Tom 1 TR606 Tom M Lo Bit PHH TR606 Tom H1 Noise OHH LoFi Min Hit Scratch 3 TR606 Tom H Scratch 7 Crash Cym 2 Slight Bell Vinyl Noise Scratch 4 TR909 Crash1 Syn Low Atk2 TR606 Tom H2 Tibet Cymbal Cajon 1 Scratch 5 TR606 Tom H MG Zap 7 Jazz Ride 2 Wind Chime Cajon 2 Scratch 6 Lite OHH 1 Syn Swt Atk1 Splash Cym Scratch 2 Cajon 3 Old Clap TR909 Crash2 Syn Swt Atk4 Rock Rd Edge Scratch 1 Conga Hi Mt Hand Clap Lite OHH 2 Conga Thumb Tamborine 3 Scratch 10 Conga Lo Mt R8 Clap CR78 Tamb 2 Triangle 1 Guiro Long Scratch 9 Conga Hi 51 Cabasa Cut TR909 Crash Triangle 2 Gospel Clap Smear Hit 2 Conga Lo Sip R8 Shaker JD Sm Metal2 Euro Hit 1 Tibet Cymbal Lofi Min Hit Conga Hi Op Tamborine 2 Lite OHH 3 Tao Hit Wind Chime Thin Beef Conga Lo Op Cabasa Down Syn Swt Atk1 Narrow Hit 2 Mix
124. am Change message reception These messages are used to select Tones OFF ON Using the Prelude as a MIDI Sound Module If you want to use the Prelude with an external MIDI sequencer for example to create Styles proceed as follows 1 Press SONG to put the Prelude in Song mode 2 Press PERFORM so it s lit then use the VALUE dial to select the preset Performance 128 Init Performance NOTE 40 will apply only to the part that you play manually on the Prelude the Upper Part or Lower Part 43 Using MIDI Connecting to a Computer via the USB MIDI Connector If you use a USB cable commercially available to connect the USB MIDI connector located on the Prelude s rear panel to the USB connector of your computer you ll be able to do the following things Use the Prelude to play SMF played back by MIDI compatible software By transferring MIDI data between the Prelude and your sequencer software yov ll be able to enjoy a wide range of possibilities for music production and editing Connect the Prelude to your computer as shown below Computer To USB connector USB cable of computer m gt USB MIDI connector Prelude Refer to the Roland website for system requirements Roland website http www roland com NOTE If you are using Windows XP Windows Vista you must log onto Windows as one of the following users in
125. ample NOTE Before making connections with other devices you must turn down the volume of all devices and turn off the power to avoid malfunctions or speaker damage Play the Prelude s sounds from your MIDI sequencer MIDI sound module Prelude sequencer Use the Prelude to play your MIDI sound module MIDI Channels MIDI provides sixteen channels numbered 1 16 Even if two MIDI devices are connected you won t be able to select or play sounds on the other device unless both devices are set to the same MIDI channel The Prelude is capable of receiving on all channels 1 16 IF the Prelude s BACKING TYPE SONG is on MIDI channels 1 16 will be received by Track 1 16 IF the Prelude s BACKING TYPE STYLE is on MIDI channels 1 16 will be received by the Style Parts MIDI channel Track Style 1 1 Accomp 1 2 Accomp bass 3 3 Accomp 2 4 4 Upper Part 5 5 Accomp 3 6 6 7 7 Accomp 4 8 8 Accomp 5 9 9 Accomp 6 10 10 Accomp drums 11 11 Lower Part 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 Melody Intelligence 16 16 MIDI Parameters For details on how to make these settings refer to How to Make System Settings MENU 45 MIDI parameters other than Local Switch will be saved as soon as you exit system edit mode Local Switch If the notes you play on the keyboard are sent to the sound generator via both of the two routes 1 and 2 as shown in the diagram th
126. and listen to the playback cf gt Input settings for the EXT INPUT jack p 18 Turning the Power On Off Turning the power on NOTE Once the connections have been completed p 14 turn on power to your various devices in the order specified By turning on devices in the wrong order you risk causing malfunction and or damage to speakers and other devices 1 Before you turn on the power turn the VOLUME knob all the way to the left to minimize the volume 2 Press the rear panel POWER switch to turn on the power NOTE This unit is equipped with a protection circuit A brief interval a few seconds after power up is required before the unit will operate normally NOTE If the Prelude is connected to a keyboard amp or audio amp turn on the power of the Prelude first and then switch on your amp 3 Turn the VOLUME knob to adjust the volume of the Prelude Turning the power off 1 Before you turn off the power turn the VOLUME knob all the way to the left to minimize the volume 2 Press the POWER switch once again to turn off the power NOTE If the Prelude is connected to a keyboard amp or audio amp switch off the power to your amp first then turn off the power on the Prelude 15 Introduction Adjusting the Display Contrast LCD CONTRAST knob 1 Turn the LCD CONTRAST knob on the rear panel Basic Operation Changing a Value Moving the curs
127. ani eee 96 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 B E a F x a i a BB o N o g x I N A o YE g a o 103 1177 Snare Menu 1178 Snr Rim Menu 1179 HiHat Menu 1180 Tom Menu 1181 Clp amp Cym amp Hit 1182 FX SFX Menu Reg Snri p GoodOld Snr1 Reg CHH 1 p Reg F Tom p Hand Clap MG Zap 1 Reg Snrimf GoodOld Snr2 Reg CHH 1 mf Reg F Tom f Club Clap MG Zap 2 Reg Snr1 f GoodOld Snr3 Reg CHH 1 f Reg L Tom p Real Clap MG Zap 3 Reg Snr1ff GoodOld Snr4 Reg CHH 1 ff Reg L Tom f Bright Clap MG Zap 4 Reg Snr2 p GoodOld Snr5 Reg CHH 2 mf Reg M Tom p R8 Clap MG Zap 5 Reg Snr2 f GoodOld Snr6 Reg CHH 2 f Reg M Tom f Gospel Clap MG Zap 6 Reg Snr2ff Dirty Snr 1 Reg CHH 2 ff Reg H Tom p Amb Clap MG Zap 7 Amb Snri Dirty Snr 2 Reg PHH mf Reg H Tom f TR808 Clap 1 MG Zap 8 Amb Snr1 f Dirty Snr 4 Reg PHH f Reg L TomFlm TR808 Clap 2 MG Zap 9 Amb Snr2 Dirty Snr 5 Reg OHH mf Reg M TomFl
128. animent will start the moment you play a note at the left side of the Split Point i e in the Lower Part area If you leave SYNC STOP on button lit the accompaniment will stop the moment you take your hand off of the Lower Part area This is great for songs where you need breaks i e one or several beats of silence To defeat this setting press the button so it goes out Saving the Current Settings in a Performance See Saving a Performance WRITE p 39 Selecting a Music Style The Style memory locations are organized as follows Type Explanation PRST These are the Styles built into the Prelude Preset They cannot be overwritten When you create Style data on your computer USER save it to USB memory and load it into the Prelude it will be written into this USER area p 48 Selecting a Style Using the VALUE dial 1 Press STYLE so the button is lit 2 Use the STYLE FAMILY buttons to select a Style by genre Immediately after you press one of the STYLE FAMILY buttons the screen will show the name of the first Style in the selected genre Backing Track Functions After importing new Styles from a USB memory you can also press USER to select a User Style 3 Turn the VALUE dial to step through the Styles one by one When the cursor in the screen is at the Style number you can also select a Style by turning NUMERIC on using the TONE SELECT buttons to enter a Style number a
129. ardless of where the cursor is located Adding Harmony to the Upper Tone MELODY INTELL While a Music Style is playing p 24 the matching harmony is automatically added to the notes you are playing in the Upper Part This function is called Melody Intelligence Those automatic harmonies are based on the chords you play in the lower section The Melody Intelligence function will be on when you turn MELODY INTELL on button lit The Melody Intelligence function is only available while the STYLE button lights Selecting the type of harmony 1 Press MELODY INTELL so the button is lit When you play something in the Upper Part harmony is added 2 Press and hold MELODY INTELL and turn the VALUE dial to select the Melody Intelligence type Parameter Value DUET ORGAN COMBO STRINGS CHOIR BLOCK BIG BAND COUNTRY Type TRADITIONAL BROADWAY GOSPEL RO MANCE LATIN COUNTRY GUITAR COUN TRY BALLAD WALTZ ORGAN OCTAVE TYPE 1 OCTAVE TYPE 2 3 Press EXIT to return to the Main screen 4 Toturn the Melody Intelligence off press MELODY INTELL so its light goes out Using the Metronome It s convenient to use the metronome when you re practicing a new song Press MENU 2 Use V 1 select System then press ENTER 3 Use lt q p gt 1 to select METRONOME page and use 1 V 1 to select a parameter 4 Turn the VALUE dial to select the value
130. ation is applied Sens 0 127 ae amount of frequency modulation applied Determines whether the frequency modula Polarity UP DOWN tion moves towards higher frequencies UP or lower frequencies DOWN Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low frequency range High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high frequency range Balance D100 0W Volume balance between the direct sound ane DO 100W D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level E STEP RING MO DULATOR This is a ring modulator that uses a 16 step sequence to vary the frequency at which modulat ion is applied Lin Step Ring Mod 2 Band EQ L out R in Step Ring Mod 2 Band EQ R out Parameter Range Explanation Step 01 16 0 127 Frequency of ring modulation at each step Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz note Rate at which the 16 step sequence will cycle Attack 0 127 Speed at which the modulation fre quency changes between steps Low Gain 15 415 dB Amori of boost cut for the low requency range High Gain 15 415 dB Amount of boost cut for the high requency range I X Volume balance of the original Balance D100 0W DO 00W Yond sound WI Level 0 127 Output volume TREMOLO Cyclically modulates the volume to add tremolo effect to the sound Lin 2 Band EQ L out Rin 2 Band EQ R out Parameter Value Description Modulation Wave TRI SQR SIN SAW1 TRI triangle wave SQR square wave SAW2 si SIN sin
131. ay the Prelude sound is produced based on data in the temporary area When you edit a performance you do not directly modify the data in memory rather you call up the data into the temporary area and edit it there Settings in the temporary area are temporary and will be lost when the power is turned off or when you select another performance To keep the settings you have modified you must write them into rewritable memory Rewritable memory System memory System memory stores system parameter settings that determine how the Prelude functions Some settings cannot be overwritten For details refer to System settings that are not stored p 47 User memory User memory is where you normally store the data you need To store a Performance or a Song execute Write procedure 28 39 Introduction Non Rewritable memory Preset memory Data in Preset memory cannot be rewritten However you can call up settings from preset Performances into the temporary area modify them and then store the modified data in rewritable memory USB memory You can back up your settings to USB memory in the following units of data p 48 Sound System User Performances System settings Style User Styles Song User Songs All Style and Song in addition to the Sound System data listed above Making Connections NOTE To prevent malfunction and or damage to speakers or other devices always turn down the
132. back to the effect is filtered out If you P BYPASS don t want to filter out any the high fre quencies set this parameter to BYPASS Delay 1 4 Pan L64 63R Stereo location of Delays 1 4 Delay 1 4 Level 0 127 Output level of Delays 1 4 Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low frequency range High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high frequency range Balance D100 0W Volume balance between the direct sound DO 100W D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level ENE REVERSE DELAY This is a reverse delay that adds a reversed and delayed sound to the input sound A tap delay is connected immediately after the reverse delay Lin L out Feedback Rev Delay Rin R out Parameter Range Explanation Threshold 0 127 Volume at which the reverse de lay will begin to be applied Rev Delay Time 0 1300 ms note Delay time from when sound is input into the reverse delay until the delay sound is heard Proportion of the delay sound Rev Delay 98 989 that is to be returned to the input Feedback of the reverse delay negative values invert the phase Frequency at which the high fre Rev Delay HF 200 8000 Hz quency content of the reverse de Damp BYPASS layed sound will be cut BYPASS no cut Rev Delay Pan 164 63R Panning of the reverse delay soun Rev Delay Level 0 127 Volume of the reverse delay sound Parameter Range Explanation Delay time from when sound
133. be able to select preset Performances if you choose PRST or user Performances if you choose USER 3 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the Performance number and use the VALUE dial to select a Performance When the cursor in the screen is at the Performance number you can also select a Performance by turning NUMERIC on using the TONE SELECT buttons to enter a Performance number and then pressing ENTER Choosing from the Performance list 1 In the Main screen use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the Performance number 2 Press ENTER 3 Use lt q 1 p gt to select Preset or User You ll be able to select preset Performances if you choose Preset or user Performances if you choose User 36 4 Use II or the VALUE dial to select a Performance Performance Functions and Effects Parameter Value Explanation 5 Press ENTER to set the Performance This lets you use simple fingering If you press EXIT without pressing ENTER the list will STANDARD to specify a chord without having close without the currently selected Performance being to play all the notes in the chord changed The chord will consist of only the PIANO note s you play on the keyboard Editing a Performance in the Lower Part You can edit the settings of a Performance and store them as INTEL MA can pay chardsas Perf in Chord Intelligence
134. ble for re recording operations To use such SMF songs as a starting point for parts you want to add or replace you first need to import the song in p 48 Performing along with a song MINUS ONE CENTER CANCEL By pressing MINUS ONE CENTER CANCEL you can perform the following operations depending on the type of song data File Function Explanation Mutes the specified Part To Minus specify the Part that will be muted SMF 155 refer to Specifying the Part that will be muted p 30 Minimizes the playback volume m Center of the sound that s heard from the Audio file Cancel center e g vocal or melody instrument Each time you press MINUS ONE CENTER CANCELI the function will turn on button lit or off button unlit Editing Playlist UKU If you modify the content of the playlist an will be shown before the playlist name If you want to keep the playlist you changed execute the Write operation see the right column If you select a different playlist without writing your settings they will revert to their original state Selecting the playback mode 1 In the PLAYLIST SELECT p 31 or SONG SELECT screen 31 choose the P INFO icon and then press ENTER 2 Use V to select Chain Play or Repeat All for the Playback Mode 3 Turn the VALUE dial or press the ENTER button to add or remove a check mark A function is on when a check mark has been added
135. can also be connected to audio equipment such as a monitor speaker or a stereo set or use headphones You can record your playing or a song recorded on the Prelude onto an audio recording device Connect the OUTPUT jacks on the Prelude s rear panel to the input jacks of your external device 8 Stereo headphones 1 8 a Monitor speakers etc NOTE The internal speakers are switched off when you connect one or two pairs of headphones Connecting a pedal and switch NOTE You must switch off the Prelude s power before you connect a pedal and or switch Connect a separately available pedal switch Roland DP Series to the HOLD PEDAL jack on the rear panel You can use this pedal switch to sustain notes even after taking your hands off the keyboard Connect a separately available pedal switch Roland DP Series a separately available foot switch Boss FS 5U or separately available expression pedal Roland EV 5 to the rear panel CONTROL PEDAL jack You can use this to control various functions that you assign p 36 Introduction NOTE Use only the specified expression pedal EV 5 sold separately By connecting any other expression pedals you risk causing malfunction and or damage to the unit Connecting an audio player to the EXT INPUT jack You can connect an MP3 player or other audio device to the Prelude s EXT INPUT jack
136. chorus Specifies the amount of reverb that will be Lower applied to the sound of MFX Reverb the Lower Part that has 0 127 Send passed through MFK Set this to O if you don t want to apply reverb Specifies how the sound routed through chorus will be output MAIN Output to the Chorus OUTPUT jacks in stereo MARIN Output REV O bi REV Select Output to reverb in M R mono M R Output fo the OUTPUT jacks in stereo and to reverb in mono See Multi Effects Parameters 56 See Chorus Parameters p 82 Page Effects REVERB The Prelude contains built in reverb chorus and multi effect MFX processors You can choose an effect type for each processor NOTE will apply only to the realtime performance of the part you play by hand the Upper Part or Lower Part Be aware that MFX never applies to recorded song data Editing the Reverb Chorus and MFX Effects 1 Press REVERB The Reverb setting screen will appear 2 Use lt q p gt to select a page and use lto select the parameter that you want to edit On some pages the display also shows the MFX that is pie linked to the Tone that currently selected for the Upper and Lower parts The Effect Send allows you to set the Chorus and Reverb Send values for the Upper and Lower parts 3 Turn the VALUE dial to edit the value 4 When you re finished editing the effect settings press REVERB or EXI
137. cted to the CONTROL PEDAL jack EXPRESSION The pedal will function as an Expression pedal Chord detection in the Lower Part area of the keyboard will be off CHORD while you hold down the pedal OFF allowing you to perform using the entire keyboard The setting will return to its previous state when you release the pedal Chord detection in the Lower Part area will turn off when you press the pedal allowing you to perform using CHORD the entire keyboard The setting will TOGGLE return to its previous state when you press the pedal once again so that chord detection will be on for the Lower Part area Pedal The pedal will function as a Assign Sostenuto pedal When you press the pedal notes that are already SOSTENUT being held down will be sustained This function can be used only for the keyboard part The pedal will function as a Soft pedal Notes you play while holding SOFT down the pedal will have a softer tone This function can be used only for the keyboard part ROTARY The pedal will switch the speed er the SLOW rotary effect This is valid only if the FAST ROTARY type is selected for MFX p 40 START The pedal will start stop the backing STOP or song playback BASS The pedal will switch the Bass Inversion INVERSION function on off p 37 PUNCH The pedal will control punch in and IN OUT punch out during song recording p 28 45 System Settings
138. d Reduce the amount of MIDI messages that are being transmitted The MIDI IN connection was broken Check that there is no problem with the MIDI cable MIDI Offline connected to the Prelude s MIDI IN and that the MIDI cable was not disconnected Now Playing The Style Song USB Memory Player is cur Either stop playback or wait until playback has end rently playing ed Now Recording That operation cannot be executed because recording is in progress Either stop recording or wait until recording is fin ished Memory Full The Style Song could not be saved because there is insufficient user memory Delete unneeded user data Cannot Record Recording could not be started You cannot record if BACKING TYPE USB MEMO RY PLAYER is on Set BACKING TYPE to something other than USB MEMORY PLAYER Cannot Store Anymore Styles No more Styles can be saved Please delete unneeded user Styles Cannot Store Anymore Songs No more Songs can be saved Please delete unneeded user Songs 55 Effects List Multi Effects Parameters The multi effects feature 78 different kinds of effects Some of the effects consist of two or more different effects connected in series
139. d Time 0 127 Time length of reverberation Size 1 8 Size of the simulated room or hall Adjusts the frequency above which the high High Cut 160 Hz 12 5 frequency content of the reverb will be re g kHz BYPASS duced If you do not want to reduce the high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Density 0 127 Density of reverb Adjusts the change in the density of the reverb over m time The higher the value the more the density in Diffusion 0 127 creases with time The effect of this setting is most pronounced with long reverb times LF Dam Adjusts the frequency below which the low fre Fr 50 4000 Hz quency content of the reverb sound will be re eq duced or damped Adjusts the amount of damping applied to the LF Damp 34 6 dp frequency range selected with LF Damp With Gain Be a setting of 0 there will be no reduction of the reverb s low frequency content HF Damp 4000 Hz 12 5 Adjusts the frequency above which the high frequency content of the reverb sound will be Fr kHz ene eq reduced or damped Adjusts the amount of damping applied to the HF Damp 34 6 dp frequency range selected with HF Damp With Gain SUV a setting of O there will be no reduction of the reverb s high frequency content 83 Tone List Nos 897 1152 Tones and Nos 1185 1193 Rhythms are GM2 sounds
140. d in any form without the written permission of ROLAND EUROPE For the U K IMPORTANT THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE BLUE NEUTRAL BROWN LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED Under no circumstances must either of the above wires be connected to the earth terminal of a three pin plug Using the unit safely INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE PREVENTION OF FIRE ELECTRIC SHOCK OR INJURY TO PERSONS About N WARNING and NCAUTION Notices About the Symbols a The A symbol alerts the user to important instructions or Used for intended to alert the warnings The specific meaning of the symbol is A WARNING user to the risk of death S cse VETE T My determined by the design contained within the triangle In should the unit be used improperly the case of the symbol at left it is used for general cautions warnings or alerts to danger Used for instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of injury or material The Qsymbol alerts the user to items that must never be damage should the unit be used carried
141. dConga OpenHi Conga 64 Low Conga Low Conga Low Conga Low Conga Ana LowConga Low Conga 65 High Timbale High Timbale High Timbale High Timbale High Timbale High Timbale LEE Timbale Low Timbale Low Timbale Low Timbale Low Timbale Low Timbale 67 High Agogo High Agogo High Agogo High Agogo High Agogo High Agogo EE Low Agogo Low Agogo Low Agogo Low Agogo Low Agogo Low Agogo 69 Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa E Maracas Maracas Maracas Maracas Ana Maracas Maracas 71 ShortWhistle ShortWhistle ShortWhistle ShortWhistle ShortWhistle ShortWhistle c5 72 Long Whistle Long Whistle Long Whistle Long Whistle Long Whistle Long Whistle El Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro 74 Long Guiro Long Guiro Long Guiro Long Guiro Long Guiro Long Guiro 75 Claves Claves Claves Claves Ana Claves Claves 76 Hi WoodBlock Hi WoodBlock Hi WoodBlock Hi WoodBlock Hi WoodBlock Hi WoodBlock 77 LowWoodBlock LowWoodBlock LowWoodBlock LowWoodBlock LowWoodBlock LowWoodBlock Em Mute Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Cuica 79 Open Cuica Open Cuica Open Cuica Open Cuica Open Cuica Open Cuica Eso MuteTriangle MuteTriangle MuteTriangle MuteTriangle MuteTriangle MuteTriangle 81 OpenTriangle OpenTriangle OpenTriangle OpenTriangle OpenTriangle OpenTriangle TEM Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker 83 Jingle Bell Jingle Bell Jingle Bell Jingle Bell J
142. ded since its format is in Do not use this file correct Failed to write the data Write the data once again Failed to write data to USB memory Make sure that USB memory is correctly connected Data cannot be written because the USB mem Delete unneeded files from the USB memory Alter Write Error ory has no more free space natively use a different USB memory device one that has more free space available The file or the USB memory itself is write pro tected Make sure that the file or the USB memory is not write protected Incorrect File This is a file that the 55 is unable to play Do not use this file This song has not been transferred from Playl ist Editor to USB memory Select the song for transfer from Playlist Editor and transfer the data once again to USB memory The file uses a sampling rate that the Prelude cannot play Use a song whose sampling rate is 44 1 kHz System Memory Damaged It is possible that the contents of system memo ry have been damaged Please execute a Factory Reset If this does not resolve the problem contact your dealer or a nearby Roland service center File Not Found The file was not found in user memory Save the file once again in user memory The file was not found in USB memory Save the file once again in USB memory MIDI Buffer Full An unusually large amount of MIDI data was received and could not be processe
143. due to dust on the record Level Hiss Noise 0 127 Volume of continuous hiss Level Total Noise 0 127 Volume of overall noise Level Wow 0 127 Depth of long cycle rotational irregularity Flutter 0 127 Depth of shortcycle rotational irregularity Random 0 127 WA of indefinite cycle rotational irregular one WOW 0 127 Depth of overall rotational irregularity Balance D100 0W Volume balance between the direct sound DO 100W D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level PITCH SHIFTER Feedback Pitch Shifter A stereo pitch shifter Lin Rin Pitch Shifter Pitch Shifter L out 2 Band EQ 2 Band EQ R out Parameter Value Description Coarie 24 412 semi Adjusts the pitch of the pitch shift ed sound in semitone steps Fine 100 100 cent Adjusts pitch of the pitch shift ed sound in 2 cent steps Adjusts the delay time from the Delay Time 0 1300 ms note direct sound until the pitch shifted sound is heard Adjusts the proportion of the O8 4099 pitch shifted sound that is fed Feedback xi back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Volume balance between the di Balance D100 0W DO 100W rect sound and the pitch shift ed sound W Level 0 127 Output Level 62 2VOI PITCH SHIFTER 2VOICE PITCH SHIFTER Shifts the pitch of the original
144. e Time 5 500 ms Adjusts the time from when the re verb is heard until it disappears Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Volume balance between the di Balance D100 0W DO 100W rect sound D and the reverb sound W Level 0 127 Output Level OVERDRIVE CHORUS O L out Balance D Balance W O R out Lin Overdrive Rin Balance D Parameter Value Description Overdrive Drive 0 127 Degree of distortion Also changes the volume Overdrive Pan L64 63R ae location of the overdrive soun Chorus Pre Adiusts the delay time from the di 0 0 100 0 ms rect sound until the chorus sound is Delay heard Chorus Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz note Frequency of modulation Chorus Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation Adjusts the volume balance be tween the sound that is sent Chorus Balance D100 0W DO 100W through the chorus W and the sound that is not sent through the chorus D Level 0 127 Output Level OVERDRIVE FLANGER Lin Balance D O r Q4 FI anger L out Balance W CY Balance W Rin R out Balance D Parameter Value Description Overdrive Drive 0 127 Degree of distortion Also changes the volume Overdrive Pan L64 63R Stereo location of the overdrive sound Fl Adjusts the delay time from when Delay e 0 0 100 0 ms the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Flang
145. e notes will be duplicated or interrupted To prevent this you can disconnect route 1 by using the Local Off setting You should turn this setting Off if you ve connected a MIDI sequencer to the Prelude 1 Local on j Sequencer MIDI Sound generator IN age gt MIDI OUT WY 2 Thru setting turned on Play a nate once it s sounded twice NOTE Immediately after the power is turned on this setting will be On Parameter Explanation Value Specifies whether MIDI messages MIDI Tx i Switch will not be transmitted OFF or will OFF ON be transmitted ON Upper Tx Specifies the transmit channel for 1 16 Channel the Upper Part Lower Tx Specifies the transmit channel for 1 16 Channel the Lower Part Specifies whether MIDI messages MIDI Rx il il Switch will not be received OFF or will OFF ON be received ON Upper Rx Specifies the receive channel for 1 16 Channel the Upper Part Lower Rx Specifies the receive channel for 1 16 Channel the Lower Part This is an on off switch for Pitch Bend message transmission Tx Pitch Bend These messages temporarily raise OFF ON or lower the pitch of the keyboard mode Tone This is an on off switch for Modulation message transmission Mod sa These messages apply vibrato to the OFF ON keyboard mode Tone control change CC 01 This is an on off switch for Tx Program Program Change message OF
146. e wave SAW1 2 sawtooth wave Mod Wave SAW1 SAW2 Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz note Frequency of the change Depth 0 127 Depth to which the effect is applied Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Level 0 127 Output Level 18 AUTO Cyclically modulates the stereo location of the sound Lin 2 Band EQ L out Parameter Value Description Modulation Wave TRI SQR SIN SAW1 TRI triangle wave SQR square wave SAW2 gt SIN sine wave SAW1 2 sawtooth wave Mod Wave SAW1 SAW2 L L Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz note Frequency of the change Depth 0 127 Depth to which the effect is applied Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Level 0 127 Output Level 19 STEP This uses 16 sequence to vary panning of sound Lin L out sucer By applying successive cuts to the sound this effect turns conventional sound into a sound that appears to be played as a backing phrase This is especially effective when applied to sustain type sounds Parameter Value Description Step 01 16 L64 63R Level at each step 0 05 10 00 Rate at which the 16 step sequence will cy Rate Hz note cle Speed at which the level changes between steps Attack 0 127 Specifies whether an input note will cause the sequence to resume from the f
147. eavier low end Low Boost Level 0 127 Depending on the Isolator and filter settings this effect may be hard to dis tinguish Level 0 127 Output Level 04 LOW BOOST Boosts the volume of the lower range creating powerful lows Lin 2 Band EQ L out Rin 2 Band EQ R out Parameter Value Description 50 125 Hz Center frequency at which the lower requency range will be boosted Boost Gain O 12 dB Amount by which the lower range will be boosted WIDE MID Width of the lower range that will be Boost Width NARROW boosted Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low frequency range High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high frequency range Level 0 127 Output level 05 SUPER FILTER This is filter with an extremely sharp slope The cutoff frequency can be varied cyclically Lin Super Filter L out Rin Super Filter R out Parameter Value Description Filter type Frequency range that will pass through each filter Filter Type LPF BPF HPF LPF frequencies below the cutoff NOTCH BPF frequencies in the region of the cutoff HPF frequencies above the cutoff NOTCH frequencies other than the re gion of the cutoff Amount of attenuation per octave 36 dB extremely steep Filter Slope 12 24 36 dB 2 dB steep 12 dB gentle Filter Cutoff frequency of the filter 0 127 Increasing this value will raise the cutoff
148. ected song For details refer to Changing the song order p 33 6 DELETE icon Deletes the currently selected song from the playlist For details refer to Deleting the song p 33 Song Playback USB MEMORY PLAYER Connect the USB memory containing the playlist and songs to the Prelude and turn USB MEMORY PLAYER on Play the songs as described below Use the USB MEMORY PLAYER CONTROL buttons to specify the song playback location Returns to the beginning of the song i Pressing this button at the beginning of the song moves to the previous song Rewinds the song ao Pb 51 Moves to the next song gt ll Plays or pauses the song FasHorwards the song Selecting a playlist and playing it 1 In the Main screen move the cursor to the PLAYLIST icon in the upper line of the screen and press ENTER The PLAYLIST SELECT screen will appear Alternatively you can access the PLAYLIST SELECT screen from the Main screen by pressing USB MEMORY PLAYER with USB MEMORY PLAYER turned on button lit 31 Backing Track Functions 2 Usel A JI V 1 to select playlist that you want to play 3 When you press B gt ll the songs in the selected playlist will be played in the specified order Press EXIT to return to the Main screen 4 To stop the song playback press B gt II If you then press B gt IIl playback will start from the point at which yo
149. ed at the bar line is called a Fill In The Prelude automatically plays the appropriate phrase for the selected Style Stopping a Style 1 Press START STOP once again to make the backing stop iR If you press ENDING instead of START STOP the ending phrase will play and then the backing will stop Adjusting the Part Balance PART VIEW IF STYLE is on or if all of the BACKING TYPE buttons are off you can access the PERFORM MIXER screen by pressing PART VIEW In the PERFORM MIXER screen you can adjust the volume for each Part of the Style You can also mute silence a specific Part or play only a specific Part 1 With STYLE turned on press PART VIEW The PERFORM MIXER screen will appear 2 Use 1 p gt to select part whose settings you want to make and use V to select the item that you want to set Display Part LWR LOWER UPR UPPER ADR Accompaniment Drum ABS Accompaniment Bass ACI AC Accompaniment 1 6 Parameter Value Explanation LEVEL 0 127 Adjusts the volume of the Part MUTE OFF Specifies whether the sound will be ON muted ON or heard OFF SOLO OFF Specifies whether this Part alone will ON be heard by itself ON or not OFF 3 To exit the PERFORM MIXER screen press EXIT or press PART VIEW so its light is turned off Sync Start Stop SYNC buttons If you leave SYNC START on button lit the accomp
150. edet 43 Rx Modulation s eR Goes een aaa 43 Rx Pitch Bend 43 Rx Program Change a e 43 RX SYNC ice eoi ee D Rule AR eR o 43 Saving Performarnce 39 Playlist settings ssse 33 DONG Sekt ete bet 28 User Data to USB Memory 48 Screen Sayer Time eei eite tet n 45 Single mode iac ce cen re er RR EE 19 SMB zeiten eet ett pe etia 30 SMF Audio files that can be played 30 SOLO ien tee eet eise dh 25 Solo Su us ys 27 SONG sasan sau 23 29 SorndQs Lt eH a D 13 26 SONG INFO LEVEL 33 Song Initialize window e 27 DONG 28 Song Sfder osis onne AAA oe Dette de 33 SONG REC Wi tee iste teet RD 10 26 28 Song Rec Standby screen 28 SONG SELECT screen 31 Index SONG TRACK ia 27 DONG rans o ods p naq E e ee 21 SONG USB MEMORY PLAYER CONTROL 30 Songlist vce sac E DU E 30 32 SPLIT S 11 19 Spliimedes 5 eee T Suge redet dens 19 Split Pointer DEO SE UR eis 19 24 37 STARTZSTOP iere t OE ERE 24 STYLE rt ret ge rige eng 23 24 Style Music Style ss
151. egative settings invert the phase Adjusts the frequency above which sound HFD 200 8000 Hz fed back to the effect is filtered out If you Smp BYPASS don t want to filter out any high frequen cies set this parameter to BYPASS Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz Frequency of modulation note Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation Phase 0 180 deg Spatial spread of the sound Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low frequency range High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high frequency range Balance D100 0W Volume balance between the direct sound 100W D and the delay sound W Level 0 127 Output level 3TAP PAN DELAY Produces three delay sounds center left and right Lin Rin Balance D Parameter Value Description Delay Left 0 2600 ms Adjusts the time until the delay sound is Right Center note heard Center Adjusts the amount of the delay sound 98 98 that s fed back into the effect Negative Feedback QS settings invert the phase Adjusts the frequency above which sound HF Dam 200 8000 Hz fed back to the effect is filtered out If you P BYPASS do not want to filter out any high frequen cies set this parameter to BYPASS 0 127 Volume of each delay Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low frequency range High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high frequency range Balance D100 0W Volume balance between the direct sound DO 100W D and the delay sound W Level 0 127 Output level mar
152. el 0 127 Output Level ra DISTORTION CHORUS The parameters are essentially the same as in 66 OVERDRIVE gt CHORUS with the exception of the following two Overdrive Drive Distortion Drive Overdrive Pan Distortion Pan L out Balance D y Balance W O R out Balance D Lin DISTORTION FLANGER The parameters are essentially the same as in 67 OVERDRIVE FLANGER with the exception of the following two Overdrive Drive Distortion Drive Overdrive Pan Distortion Pan Balance D O Feedback S Fanger P O R out Lin L out Balance W Rin Balance D DISTORTION DELAY The parameters are essentially the same os in 68 OVERDRIVE DELAY with the exception of the following two Overdrive Drive Distortion Drive Overdrive Pan Distortion Pan L out Balance D 7 Balance W Balance W Feedback O R out Lin Rin Balance D ENHANCER CHORUS Lin L out R out Mix Balance D Parameter Value Description Enhancer Sens 0 127 Sensitivity of the enhancer Level of the overtones generated Enhancer Mix 0 127 by the enhancer Adjusts the delay time from the di rect sound until the chorus sound is heard Chorus Pre Delay 0 0 100 0 ms Parameter Value Description Chorus Rate ok Fre
153. el a szimb lummal ell tott term keket nem szabad a h ztart si hullad k k z dobni Symbol oznacza e zgodnie z regulacjami w odpowiednim regionie w krajach UE produktu nie nale y wyrzuca z odpadami domowymi Produkt w opatrzonych tym symbolem nie mo na utylizowa razem z odpadami domowymi Tento symbol ud v e v zem ch EU mus b t tento v robek sb r n odd len od dom c ho odpadu jak je ur eno pro ka d region V robky nesouc tento symbol se nesm vyhazovat spolu s dom c m odpadem Tento symbol vyjadruje e v krajin ch E sa mus zber tohto produktu vykon va oddelene od domov ho odpadu pod a nariaden platn ch v konkr tnej krajine Produkty s t mto symbolom sa nesm vyhadzova spolu s domov m odpadom See s mbol n itab et EL i maades tuleb see toode olempr gist eraldi koguda nii nagu on igas piirkonnas m ratletud Selle s mboliga m rgitud tooteid ei tohi ra visata koos olmepr giga is simbolis rodo kad ES alyse is produktas turi b ti surenkamas atskirai nuo buitini atliek kaip nustatyta kiekviename regione Siuo simboliu pa enklinti produktai neturi b ti i metami kartu su buitin mis atliekomis is simbols nor da ka ES valst s o produktu j iev c atsevi i no m jsaimniec bas atkritumiem k noteikts katr re ion Produktus ar o simbolu nedr kst izmest kop ar m jsaimniec bas atkritumiem Ta simbol ozna uje da je treba proizvod v d
154. enter Cancel 4 Turn the VALUE dial to set the value 5 When you re finished making settings press EXIT NOTE The External Input and Center Cancel settings cannot be saved to User Programs or the System memory External Input is reset to On and Center Cancel to Off each time you switch on the Prelude Keyboard Mode Functions Playing Sounds from the Keyboard Keyboard Mode Immediately after you turn on the power the Prelude will be in a state where you can use the entire keyboard to play a piano sound The Prelude s keyboard can operate in one of the following three modes SINGLE The entire keyboard plays one Tone The region of the keyboard to the left of the Split Point becomes the Lower Part while the region of SPLIT the keyboard to the right of the Split Point becomes the Upper Part Each part plays a different Tone DUAL The entire keyboard plays two Tones assigned to the Upper and Lower parts simultaneously If BACKING TYPE STYLE is on the left region of the keyboard the Lower Part is used to enter chords p 24 Regardless of the current settings you can easily select Single mode by choosing the Piano Mode described below Using Single Mode If the SPLIT and DUAL are off the keyboard will be in Single mode meaning that the entire keyboard will play a single Tone When you turn on the power the Prelude will be
155. eorgheni ROMANIA TEL 266 364 609 RUSSIA MuTek Dorozhnaya ul 3 korp 6 117 545 Moscow RUSSIA TEL 095 981 4967 SLOVAKIA DAN Acoustic s r o Povazska 18 SK 940 01 Nov Z mky TEL 035 6424 330 SPAIN Roland Iberia S L Paseo Garcia Faria 33 35 08005 Barcelona SPAIN TEL 93 493 91 00 SWEDEN Roland Scandinavia A S SWEDISH SALES OFFICE Danvik Center 28 2 tr S 131 30 Nacka SWEDEN TEL 0 8 702 00 20 SWITZERLAND Roland Switzerland AG Landstrasse 5 Postfach CH 4452 Itingen SWITZERLAND TEL 061 975 9987 UKRAINE EURHYTHMICS Ltd P O Box 37 a Nedecey Str 30 UA 89600 Mukachevo UKRAINE TEL 03131 414 40 UNITED KINGDOM Roland U K Ltd Atlantic Close Swansea Enterprise Park SWANSEA SA7 9FJ UNITED KINGDOM TEL 01792 702701 BAHRAIN Moon Stores No 1231 amp 1249 Rumaytha Building Road 3931 Manama 339 BAHRAIN TEL 17 813 942 IRAN MOCO INC No 41 Nike St Dr Shariyati Ave Roberoye Cerahe Mirdamad Tehran IRAN TEL 021 2285 4169 ISRAEL Halilit P Greenspoon amp Sons Ltd 8 Retzif Ha alia Hashnia St Tel Aviv Yafo ISRAEL TEL 03 6823666 JORDAN MUSIC HOUSE CO LTD FREDDY FOR MUSIC P O Box 922846 Amman 11192 JORDAN TEL 06 5692696 KUWAIT EASA HUSAIN AL YOUSIFI amp SONS CO Al Yousifi Service Center P O Box 126 Safat 13002 KUWAIT TEL 00 965 802929 LEBANON Chahine S A L George Zeidan St Chahine Bldg Achrafieh
156. er Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz note Frequency of modulation Flanger Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation Adjusts the proportion of the Flanger 98 989 flanger sound that is fed back into Feedback gee the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Flanger Balance D100 0W DO 100W Adjusts the volume balance be tween the sound that is sent through the flanger W and the sound that is not sent through the flanger D Level 0 127 Output Level ra OVERDRIVE DELAY L in L out O Balance D ae Feedback Balance W Y Balance W Rin R out Balance D Parameter Value Description Overdrive Drive 0 127 Degree of distortion Also changes the volume Overdrive Pan 164 63R Stereo location of the overdrive sound Delay Time 0 2600 ms note Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the delay sound is heard Delay Feedback 98 49876 Adjusts the proportion of the de lay sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Delay HF Damp 200 8000 Hz BYPASS Adjusts the frequency above which sound fed back to the ef fect will be cut If you do not want to cut the high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Delay Balance D100 0W DO 100W Adjusts the volume balance be tween the sound that is sent through the delay W and the sound that is not sent through the delay D Lev
157. erformances 16 track song sequencer is builtin allowing you to record your performances on the Prelude O SMF data can be stored in internal memory and played back or used for minus one performance Designed for easy use High quality 11W stereo amplification system with two built in speakers Lightweight and compact body designed for portability large ful graphic white LCD for excellent visibility Friendly user interface featuring Style Family buttons for direct selection Intuitive controllers such as the D Beam controller Import sounds via USB memory USB Import function allows you to add sounds Tones New sounds can be added via USB memory Contents Using the unit safely 3 Important notes 5 Main Featur6S5 7 Panel Descriptions 10 Front Paral oi IE RD 10 Rear Panel i rus 12 Introduction 13 About the Prelude 13 About Memory e een 13 Making Conneclions 14 Connecting the AC 14 Connecting External Equipmenti 15 Connecting a pedal and 15 Connecting an audio player to the EXT INPUT jack 15 Turning the Power
158. erformed only in the region you specify for re recording When you record a Song using a Style the Style data is recorded in the first measure of the Song When you play back this Song playback will begin from measure indication 2 1 Press SONG so the button is lit 2 Press PART VIEW so the button is lit The SONG TRACK screen will appear As needed make Song settings as described in step 7 of Recording a specified Part SONG TRACK 3 Press SONG REC SONG REC will blink The Song Rec Standby screen will appear 4 Use the cursor buttons to select a parameter and turn the VALUE dial to set the value Parameter Value Explanation New material is recorded as REPLACE previously recorded material is erased MIX New notes are recorded on top of notes previously recorded No count in Recording starts as OFF soon as you press B gt 1 MEAS Recording starts after a 1 bar countin Recording starts after a 2 b In 2MEAS ecording starts after 2 bar countin Recording starts as soon as you WAIT NOTE play a note on the keyboard There will be no countin OFF 1 4 Quantize corrects the timing of Input 1 8 1 8T your notes by shifting them to the Quan 1 16 1 16T nearest grid mark This specifies tize 1 32 1 32T the number of steps per measure 1 64 i e the resolution Parameter Value Explanation If this is turned ON recording will occur
159. eventing distortion from occurring 2 Band EQ L out 2 Band EQ R out Parameter Value Description Adjusts the time after the signal volume falls Release 0 127 below the Threshold Level until compression is no longer applied Threshold 0 127 sd the volume at which compression be 1 5 1 2 1 Ratio 4 1 Compression ratio 100 1 Post Gain 0 18 dB Adjusts the output gain Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low frequency range High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high frequency range Level 0 127 Output level 42 GATE Cuts the reverb s delay according to the volume of the sound sent into the effect Use this when you want to create an artificial sounding decrease in the reverb s decay Lin Gate L out 2 R out Parameter Value Description Attack 0 127 Sets the speed at which compression starts Threshold 0 127 das the volume at which compression be Post Gain 0 18 dB Adjusts the output gain Low Gain 5 15 dB Gain of the low frequency range High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high frequency range Level 0 127 Output level R in Gate R out Parameter Value Description Threshold 0 127 Volume level at which the gate begins to close Type of gate GATE The gate will close when the vol ume of the original sound decreases cut Mode ting the original sound DUCK Ducking The gate will close when the volume
160. f the song in USB memory is Adjust 12 0 you can adjust the volume within this range 12 O 12 If the song s file type is SMF you can adjust the volume individually for Parts Part 1 16 Move the cursor to the Part 1 16 0 127 number shown at the bottom of the Level screen and press ENTER and you ll be able to adjust the volume of that Part When USB MEMORY PLAYER is on you can press PART VIEW repeatedly to switch from the Main screen to SONG INFO LEVEL PERFORM MIXER p 24 Main screen Saving playlist settings to USB memory WRITE Here s how Playlist settings you ve edited on the Prelude can be saved to USB memory 1 Press WRITE 2 Use 1I V 110 select Playlist and then press ENTER The confirmation window will appear 3 Press ENTER to save playlists on the USB memory If you press EXIT you re returned to the previous screen without playlists being saved 33 Performance Functions and Effects Performance Features D Beam Controller The D Beam controller can be used simply by waving your hand over it Depending on the function that is assigned to it the D Beam controller can be used to apply varius effects and to modify the sounds BACKING TRACK VARIATION 2 3 INN TONAL WORLD USER La _ 1 Press the PITCH FILTER or VOLUME button in the D BEAM section the button you press lights blue NOTE You can t use these buttons at the same
161. fect Pitch Bend Range 0 24 TONE Specifies the range of pitch change that can be controlled using the Pitch Bend controller When TONE is selected the Tone s own settings take effect Hold Pedal Switch OFF ON Specifies whether the hold pedal will apply to the Tone ON or will not apply OFF Control Pedal Switch TERM 4 OFF ON Specifies whether the control pedal will apply to the Tone ON or will have no effect OFF This is enabled when Pedal Assign in System settings is set to EXPRESSION SOSTENUTO or SOFT p 45 Portamento is an effect that smoothly changes the pitch from one note to the next Vibrato is an effect that uses an LFO Low Frequency Oscillator to cyclically vary the pitch Performance Functions and Effects Saving a Performance WRITE Here s how the settings of the current Performance can be saved in the Prelude as a new Performance 1 Press WRITE 2 Usel All V to select Performance and then press ENTER Input a name for your user Performance 3 Use lt g p gt to move the cursor and turn the VALUE dial to change each character and then press ENTER Enter a Performance name of up to 16 characters The following characters are available space A Z 2 0 91 8 amp lt gt _ 1 Button Explanation Selects the type of character Each time you press this you will alter
162. ffect that intentionally degrades the sound quality for creative purposes Lin Compressor Lo Fi Ec L out Q R in Compressor Lo Fi R out EQ Parameter Value Description Selects the type of filter applied to the sound before it passes through the Lo Fi effect Pre Filter Type 1 6 1 Compressor off 2 6 Compressor on Degrades sound quality The sound qual LoFi Type re ity grows poorer as this value is increased Type of filter OFF no filter is used Post Filter Type OFF LPF HPF the frequency range above the HPF cuts the frequency range below the Cutoff Post Filter 200 8000 Hz Basic frequency of the Post Filter Cutoff quency Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Balance D100 0W Volume balance between the direct sound DO 100W D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 75 EE LOFI RADIO In addition to a Lo Fi effect this effect also generates radio noise Parameter Value Description Degrades the sound quality The sound qual LoFi I ity grows poorer as this value is increased Type of filter OFF no filter is used OFF LPF LPF cuts the frequency range above the Filter Type HPF Cutoff HPF cuts the frequency range below the Cutoff Filter Cutoff 200 8000 Hz Basic frequency of the Post Filter Radio 0 127 Simulates the tuning noise
163. for an extended period of time Any accumulation of dust between the power plug and the power outlet can result in poor insulation and lead to fire f smoke or unusual odor occurs Objects have fallen into or liquid has been spilled onto the unit or The unit has been exposed to rain or otherwise has become wet or The unit does not appear to operate normally or exhibits a marked change in performance In households with small children an adult should provide supervision until the child is capable of following all the rules essential for the safe operation of the unit Try to prevent cords and cables from becoming entangled Also all cords and cables should be placed so they are out of the reach of children gt Protect the unit from strong impact WI III aaa Do not drop it pal Never climb on top of nor place heavy objects on the unit gt Do not force the unit s power supply cord to sharean l lJso nanan outlet with an unreasonable number of other devices Be especially careful when using extension cords Never handle the AC adaptor or its plugs with wet the total power used by all devices you have connected to the extension cord s outlet must never exceed the power rating watts amperes for the extension cord Excessive loads can cause the insulation on the cord to heat up and eventually melt through hands when plugging into or unplugging from an outlet or this u
164. from the Punch In measure to the Punch Out measure that you specify below When the song playback reaches the measure you specified for Punch In recording will begin automatically and recording will stop at the Punch Out measure Punch 0001 Manaure at which recording In will begin Punch 0002 Menur at which recording Out will end If you assign the pedal to PUNCH IN OUT in Pedal Assign p 45 you ll be able to specify the record start and record end locations by pressing the pedal In this case turn the above Punch Sw to the OFF setting 5 Press B gt 1 to start recording 6 Perform 7 Press B gt ll to stop recording Saving a Song WRITE Here s how you can save a Song from the temporary Song memory to a user Song memory 1 Press WRITE 2 Usel 1L V J to select Song and then press ENTER Input a name for your user Song 3 Use lt q 1 p gt to move the cursor and turn the VALUE dial to change each character Enter a Song name of up to 16 characters The following characters are available A Z 0 91 amp O9 A _ Button Explanation Selects the type of character Each time you press this you will alternately select the first character 0 of a character set uppercase A or numerals and symbols 0 1 Deletes the character at the cursor location 2 Inserts a at the cursor location
165. g Gaug Abaug Aaug Bb aug Baug KA DALA AIKA AA DAWA E iu F sus4 Gsus4 Absus4 Asus4 Bb sus4 Bsus4 LTN KA ALALA LUI F 7sus4 G7sus4 Ab7sus4 A7sus4 Bb 7sus4 B7sus4 bli LR 103 Date October 15 2008 Model Prelude MIDI Im lementation Chart Version 1 00 Basic Default 1 16 1 16 Channel Changed 1 16 1 16 Default Mode 3 Mode 3 Messages Mode 3 4 M 1 Mode 3 4 M 1 Altered JE III III Note Number True Voice JESSE KRKA K 2 Note ON Velocity Note OFF L N I Key s Aftertouch Channels oojoo m Pitch Bend o Bank select Modulation Breath type Foot type Portamento time Data entry Volume Balance Panpot Expression General purpose controller 1 General purpose controller 2 General purpose controller 3 General purpose controller 4 Hold1 Portamento Sostenuto Soft Legato foot switch Hold2 Control Change Sound variation Resonance Release time Attack time Cutoff Decay time Vibrato rate Vibrato depth Vibrato delay General purpose controller 5 General purpose controller 6 General purpose controller 7 General purpose controller 8 Portamento control General purpose effects 1 Tremolo General purpose effects 3 Celeste Phaser Increment Decrement NRPN LSB MSB RPN LSB MSB Program 1 ri Change True Number m 0 127 Program Number 1 128 System Exclusive INE SS rd
166. ge Balance D100 0W Volume balance between the direct sound 0 and the delay sound W Level 0 127 Output level LONG TIME CTRL DLY LONG TIME CONTROL DELAY A delay in which the delay time can be varied smoothly and allowing an extended delay to be produced Lin L out Balance D t pu CY Balance W Feedback R in O R out Balance D Parameter Value Description Delay Time d Adjusts the time until the delay is heard Adjusts the speed which the Delay Time changes from the current setting to a speci Acceleration 0 15 fied new setting The rate of change for the Delay Time di rectly affects the rate of pitch change Adjusts the amount of the delay that s fed Feedback 98 98 back into the effect Negative settings in vert the phase Adjusts the frequency above which sound HF Dam 200 8000 Hz fed back to the effect is filtered out If you do P BYPASS not want to filler out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Pan L64 63R Stereo location of the delay Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low frequency range High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high frequency range Balance D100 0W Volume balance between the direct sound DO 100W D and the delay sound W Level 0 127 Output level 55 A virtual tape echo that produces a realistic tape delay sound This simulates the tape echo section of a Roland RE 201 Space Echo
167. gned for each Tone For details refer to Pitch Bend Range p 39 45 Assignable Pedal You can connect a separately available foot switch Boss FS 5U or a separately available expression pedal Roland EV 5 to the CONTROL PEDAL jack on the rear panel You can assign a variety of functions to this pedal For details refer to System Parameters p 45 Using Preset Performances By selecting a preset Performance you can quickly recall settings that are appropriate for the song you re playing When you select a preset performance settings for the following items will be recalled Keyboard mode Upper Tone Lower Tone settings Style settings Effects settings Transpose Octave shift Keyboard touch Chord mode Melody Intelligence Selecting a Performance PERFORMI The Performance memory locations are organized as follows Type Explanation PRST These are the Performances built into the Preset Prelude They cannot be overwritten You can use these memory locations to store USER 7 Performances you ve edited Using the VALUE dial 1 Press PERFORM to select Performance mode This may not be necessary because the Prelude selects this mode at power up 2 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the right of PERFORM located in the upper left of the screen then use the VALUE dial to choose PRST or USER You ll
168. h Setting Song 1 track 16 track Rec mode Mix Replace Recorder Count in Punch In Out Input Quantize USB Memory Player 999 songs SMF format 0 1 Audio File WAV AIFF MP3 Preset Memory Styles 130 World User Memory Styles 100 Songs 200 fuser memory is full it will not be possible to save anything even though the above limit has not been exceeded E Others Controllers Control knob 1 Pitch Bend Modulation Lever 1 USB MIDI Operating System Windows XP Home SP2 or later Windows XP Professional SP2 or later Windows Vista This does not work with the 64 bit Edition of Windows Vista Display 240 x 64 dots black graphic LCD Connectors Output Jacks L MONO R Ext Input jack mini jack Headphones Jacks 2 MIDI Connectors IN OUT Hold Pedal Jack Control Pedal Jack USB Connectors COMPUTER supports USB MIDI MEMORY supports USB 2 0 Hi Speed Flash Memory Speakers 2x 10 cm Rated power output 2x 11W Power Supply DC 12V AC Adaptor Current Draw 1 200 mA Dimensions 1 044 W x 317 D x 121 H mm Weight 7 8 kg 17 19 lbs excluding AC adaptor Accessories Owner s Manual CD ROM Style Converter 3 0 Playlist Editor AC Adaptor PSB 7U Power Cord Music rest Style Converter 3 System Requirements Operating Microsoft Windows XP System Mic
169. ich the low range Low Rate 9 951909 Hz nole flanger sound is moduloted Modulation depth for the low Low Depth BW range flanger sound Low Phase 0 180 de Spaciousness of the low range g flanger sound Proportion of the low range Low x flanger sound that is to be re Feedback wee hae turned to the input negative val ues invert the phase Delay time from when the origi High Pre Delay 0 0 100 0 ms nal sound is heard to when the high range flanger sound is heard Rate at which the high range High Rate flanger sound is modulated High Depth 0 127 asa depth ka the high range flanger soun Spaciousness of the high range High Phase 0 180 deg flanger sound Proportion of the high range High flanger sound that is to be re Feedback turned to input negative val ves invert the phase Bal D100 0W D0 100W Volume balance of the original ance PEU SE sound D and flanger sound W Level 0 127 Output volume 34 2BAND STEP FLANGER A step flanger that lets you apply an effect independently to the low frequency and high frequency ranges Lin Rin High Band Feedback Low Band Feedback High Band Feedback Low Band Feedback el High Band Step Flanger B 4 Low Band Step Flanger B A High Band Step Flanger J L out Low Band Step Flanger J Parameter Range Explanation Frequency at which the low and Split Freq 200580001112 high ranges w
170. ick ff TR909 Rim Rock Crash 1 Urbn SnRoll1 Metal Vox W1 MG Attack LD Kick mf TR909 Snr 1 MG Zap 2 Analog Snr 2 Metal Vox W2 Syn Hrd Atk4 LD Kick f TR909 Clap 1 MG Zap 9 Dist Clap Metal Vox W3 Train Pass LD Kick ff TR909 Snr 2 Smear Hit 2 Analog Snr 3 White Noise2 Syn Mtl Atk1 TY Kick mf TR909 D TomL Low Square R8 Shaker White Noise3 Syn Swt AtkL TY Kick f TR909 CHH 1 JD WoodCrak1 TR909 CHH 2 TR606 Cym 2b Syn Swt Atk7 TY Kick ff TR909 D TomL Piano Atk Nz R8 Shaker MG Blip Syn Swt AtkL SF Kick 1 TR808 CHH 2 JD WoodCrak2 TR909 PHH 2 MG Blip Rev Syn Mtl Atk2 SF Kick 2 TR909 D TomM DR202 Beep 1 Syn Hrd Atk1 DigiSpectrum Syn Swt AtkM MaxLow Kick1 TR909 OHH 1 JD WoodCrak3 TR909 OHH 2 Ice Crash DigiSpectrum MaxLow Kick2 TR909 D TomM Syn Pulse 2 SynHrd Atkia Metal Vox L2 Syn Swt AtkM Dist Kick TR909 D TomH DR202 Beep 2 SynHrd Atkib Thin Beef Syn Swt AtkH FB Kick TR909 Crash3 Narrow Hit2a TR909 Crash LoFi Min Hit Digi Loop 1 Rough Kick1 TR909 D TomH E Gtr Harm SynHrd Atkic Trance Saw Syn Swt AtkH Rough Kick2 TR909 Ride 3 Narrow Hit2b TR909 Ride 3 TB DstSqr SynLow Atkib Rough Kick3 TR909 Crash4 Euro Hit TR909 Crash Finger Snap Crotale 2 PlasticKick1 TR909 Ride 4 Jazz Lo Tom1 TR909 Ride 1 Conga 51 Op Laser 3 70 s Kick Tamborine 2 TR909 D TomL CR78 Tamb Conga Lo Op MG Zap 11 AnalogKick 1 MG Zap 2 Jazz Lo Tom2 MG Zap 2 Conga Hi Op Laser 4 PlasticKick2 Cowbell Low TR909 D TomM JD Sm Metal Triangle Mt MG Zap 4b PlasticKick3 MG Zap 6 Jazz Lo Tom3 MG Zap 6 Triangle Op C
171. iles whose sampling frequency is 44 1kHz can be played The Prelude can handle up to a maximum of 999 songs and playlists Playlist Editor can handle up to 999 playlists Playing Back SMF Audio Files You can play back SMF files or audio files saved in USB memory SMF Audio files that can be played SMF Oor 1 With format 1 SMFs there are limitations on the tracks that will be played 240 KB maximum Note that this File Size will vary slightly based on the SMF content System Exclusive Packet sizes of 512 bytes or less Audio File WAV Sampling Rate 44 1 kHz AIFF Bit Depth 8 16 24 bits Format MPEG 1 audio layer 3 Sampling Rate 44 1 kHz MP3 32 40 48 56 64 80 96 Bit Rates 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 kbps VBR Variable Bit Rate 30 USB Memory Player Screens Main Screen When you connect USB memory to the Prelude and press USB MEMORY PLAYER the Main screen will appear as follows n 2 lar HEHORY PLAYER HENSE SONG Meas 2901 7 3 881 SONG 1 2 120 A PERFORM PRST 001 HUW BEATS LOWER 01 UPPER 0001 Cmp d Bs Rich Grand 5 6 1 PLAYLIST icon Indicates the PLAYLIST SELECT screen 2 SONG icon Indicates the SONG SELECT screen 3 The number and name of the currently selected Song 4 The group number and name of the currently selected Performance 5 The number and name of the Tone selected for the Lower Part 6 The nu
172. ill be divided Delay time from when the origi Low Pre Delay 0 0 100 0 ms nal sound is heard to when the low range flanger sound is heard Rate at which the low range Low Rate 9 05 10 00 Hz note flanger sound is modulated Low Depth 0 127 Modulation depth for the low range flanger sound Low Phase 0 180 deg Spaciousness of the low range flanger sound Proportion of the low range Low flanger sound that is to be re Feedback turned to the input negative val ves invert the phase Low Step 0 10 20 00 Hz note Rate at which the steps will cycle Rate for the low range flanger sound High Pre Delay 0 0 100 0 ms Delay time from when the origi nal sound is heard to when the high range flanger sound is heard Rate at which the high range High Rate 0 05 19 99 Hz note flanger sound is moduloted High Depth 0 127 Mean depth the high range flanger soun z Spaciousness of the high range High Phase 0 180 deg flanger sound Proportion of the high range High flanger sound that is to be re Feedback M ee turned to the input negative val ves invert the phase High Step Rate at which the steps will cycle Rate 9 19 20 00 Hz note high range flanger sound j Volume balance of the original Balance D and flanger sound W Level 0 127 Output volume ER OVERDRIVE Creates a soft distortion similar to that produced by vacuum tube amplifiers g
173. ilter OFF no filter is used i LPF cuts the frequency range Filter Type OFF LEE HE above the Cutoff Freq HPF cuts the frequency range below the Cutoff Freq Cutoff Freq 200 8000 Hz Basic frequency of the filter Adjusts the delay time from when Pre Delay 0 0 100 0 ms the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz note Frequency of modulation Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation Phase 0 180 deg Spatial spread of the sound Adjusts the proportion of the 9 flanger sound that is fed back into Feedback the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Adjusts the method that will be used to hear the sound that is out put to the OUTPUT jacks The opti Output Mode SPEAKER PHONES mal 3D effect will be achieved if you select SPEAKER when using speakers or PHONES when using headphones Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Volume balance between the di Balance D100 0W DO0 100W rect sound D and the flanger sound W Level 0 127 Output Level 3p STEP FLANGER This applies a 3D effect to the step flanger sound The flanger sound will be positioned 90 degrees left and 90 degrees right rer 3D Step Flanger L out R out Parameter Value Description Adjusts the proportion of the flanger sound that is fed back into Feedback TUNE the effect Negative settings will invert the phase
174. in 2 Band EQ L out 2 Band EQ R out Parameter Value Description Speed SLOW FAST speed of the rotating speaker Switches the rotation of the rota ry speaker Brake OFF ON When this is turned on the ro tation will gradually stop When it is turned off the rota tion will gradually resume Woofer Slow 0 05 10 00 Hz Low speed rotation speed of the Speed woofer Woor Fast 0 05 10 00 Hz High speed rotation speed of the peed woofer Parameter Value Description Adjusts the rate at which the woofer rotation speeds up when Woofer Trans Up 0 127 the rotation is switched from Slow to Fast Adjusts the rate at which the Woofer Trans 0 127 woofer rotation speeds up when Down the rotation is switched from Fast to Slow Woofer Level 0 127 Volume of the woofer Tweeter Slow 0 05 10 00 Hz peed Tweeter Fast Speed 0 05 10 00 Hz Settings of the tweeter Tweeter Trans Up 0 127 The parameters are the same as for the woofer Tweeter Trans 0 127 own Tweeter Level 0 127 Sets the rotary speaker stereo im Spread 0 10 age The higher the value set the wider the sound is spread out Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Level 0 127 Output Level WA CHORUS This is a stereo chorus A filter is provided so that you can adjust the timbre of the chorus sound Balance D
175. ind Chime Wind Chime Bongo Hi Mt Wind Chime E Wood Block2M Wood Block M Wood Block2M Wood Block2M Bongo Hi 51 Wood Block M 86 Cajon 2 Cajon 2 Cajon 2 Cajon 2 Bongo Lo Sip Cajon 2 EM ConcertBD ConcertBD ConcertBD ConcertBD Bongo Hi Op ConcertBD 88 R amp B Kick R amp B Kick R amp B Kick R amp B Kick Bongo Lo Op R amp B Kick 39 Dry Kick 2 Dry Kick 2 Dry Kick 2 Dry Kick 2 Cajon 1 Dry Kick 2 E old Kick Old Kick Old Kick Old Kick Cajon 2 Old Kick 91 Jazz Doos Jazz Doos Jazz Doos Jazz Doos Cajon 3 Jazz Doos So Agogo Noise Agogo Noise Agogo Noise Agogo Noise Vint Snr 2 Agogo Noise 93 Rock OHH Rock OHH Rock OHH Rock OHH Shaker 3 Rock OHH Em JD Anklungs JD Anklungs JD Anklungs JD Anklungs WD Rim JD Anklungs 95 Rock OHH Rock OHH Rock OHH Rock OHH Mix Kick 1 Rock OHH c7 96 Cajon 3 Cajon 3 Cajon 3 Cajon 3 Mix Kick 2 Mix Kick 1 Cajon 1 Cajon 1 Cajon 1 Cajon 1 Mix Kick 3 Cajon 1 98 Mix Kick 4 Mix Clap Mix Kick 4 TY Rim f Mix Kick 4 Mix Kick 2 EE Gospel Clap Gospel Clap Gospel Clap Gospel Clap Mix Kick 5 Gospel Clap 100 Bright Clap Bright Clap Bright Clap Bright Clap Mix Clap 1 Bright Clap 101 Rock Rd Cup Rock Rd Cup Rock Rd Cup Rock Rd Cup Wind Chime Rock Rd Cup Ccowbe Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell Tibet Cymbal Cowbell 103 Crash Cym 2 Crash Cym 2 Crash Cym 2 Crash Cym 2 Crotale Crash Cym 2 93 C2136 ES E 4 a F x C3 a i a BB
176. individually play them back with the USB MEMORY PLAYER function p 32 You can import export User Performances in the Sound folder You can import export the System settings in the Sound folder You can create playlists in the Playlist folder Creating a playlist p 30 Using USB Memory Importing Data You ve Saved in USB Memory USB IMPORT Before you continue save the downloaded data from your computer to the USB memory yov re using Connect the USB memory to the Prelude and import the data you saved If you add Tones the imported Tones will be added to WORLD and SPECIAL Refer to the Roland website http www roland com 49 About V LINK Connecting the Prelude to a V LINK compatible image device allows you to control the images with the Prelude NOTE To prevent malfunction and or damage to speakers or other devices always turn down the volume and turn off the power on all devices before making any connections V LINK V LINK is a function that allows music and images to be performed together By using MIDI to connect two or more V LINK compatible devices you can easily enjoy performing a wide range of visual effects that are linked to the expressive elements of a music performance How to Use the V LINK V LINK 1 Press V LINK so the indicator is lit The V LINK screen will appear and the V LINK setting will be on Operations on the
177. ined in each region Products bearing this symbol must not be discarded together with household waste Dieses Symbol bedeutet dass dieses Produkt in EU L ndern getrennt vom Hausm ll gesammelt werden muss gem den regionalen Bestimmungen Mit diesem Symbol gekennzeichnete Produkte d rfen nicht zusammen mit den Hausm ll entsorgt werden Ce symbole indique que dans les pays de l Union europ enne ce produit doit tre collect s par ment des ordures m nag res selon les directives en vigueur dans chacun de ces pays Les produits portant ce symbole ne doivent pas tre mis au rebut avec les ordures m nag res Questo simbolo indica che nei paesi della Comunit europea questo prodotto deve essere smaltito separatamente dai normali rifiuti domestici secondo la legislazione in vigore in ciascun paese I prodotti che riportano questo simbolo non devono essere smaltiti insieme ai rifiuti domestici Ai sensi dell art 13 del D Lgs 25 luglio 2005 n 151 Este s mbolo indica que en los pa ses de la Uni n Europea este producto debe recogerse aparte de los residuos dom sticos tal como est regulado en cada zona Los productos con este s mbolo no se deben depositar con los residuos dom sticos Este s mbolo indica que nos pa ses da UE a recolha deste produto dever ser feita separadamente do lixo dom stico de acordo com os regulamentos de cada regi o Os produtos que apresentem este s mbolo n o dever o ser eliminados juntame
178. ingle Bell Jingle Bell 6 84 Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree EE Castanets Castanets Castanets Castanets Castanets Castanets 86 Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo 99 Note No 1191 PC 41 1192 PC 49 1193 PC 57 GM2 BRUSH GM2 ORCHSTRA GM2 SFX m High Q ClosedHi hat 28 Slap Pedal 29 Scratch Push Open Hi hat 30 Scratch Pull Ride Cymbal1 31 Sticks Sticks 32 Square Click Square Click 33 Metron Click Metron Click EN Metron Bell Metron Bell _ 35 Jazz Kick 2 Concert BD2 c2 36 Jazz Kick 1 ConcettBD1 EA Side Stick Side Stick wane 38 Brush Tap Concert SD EE Brush Slap Castanets High Q 40 Brush Swirl Concert SD Slap 41 BrushLowTom2 Timpani F Scratch Push 42 ClosedHi hat Timpani F Scratch Pull 43 BrushLowTom1 Timpani G Sticks EE Pedal Hi hat Timpani G Square Click 45 BrushMidTom2 Timpani A Metron Click ErE Open Hi hat Timpani A Metron Bell 47 BrushMidTom1 Timpani B GtFret Noise C348 Brush HiTom2 Timpani c Cut Noise Up CrashCymbal1 Timpani c Cut Noise Dw 50 Brush HiTom1 Timpani d Slap_St Bass m Ride Cymbal1 Timpani d FI Key Click 52 China Cymbal Timpani e Laughing 53 Ride Bell Timpani f Scream LE Tambouri
179. irst step of the sequence ON or not OFF Input Sync Sw Input Sync Threshold Volume at which an input note will be detect ed Sets the manner in which the volume chang es as one step progresses to the next LEGATO The change in volume from one step s level to the next remains unaltered If the level of a following step is the same as the one preceding it there is no change in volume SLASH The level is momentarily set to before progressing to the level of the next step This change in volume occurs even if the level of the following step is the same as the preceding step LEGATO Mode SLASH Timing of volume changes in levels for even numbered steps step 2 step 4 step 6 The higher the value the later the beat progresses Shuffle Parameter Range Explanation Step 01 16 L64 63R Pan at each step Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz note Rate at which the 1 6 step sequence will cycle Attack 0 127 at which the pan changes etween steps Specifies whether an input note will cause the sequence to resume Input Sync Sw OFF ON from the first step of the sequence ON or not OFF Input Sync Volume at which an input note will Threshold nud be detected Level 0 127 Output volume Level 0 127 Output level 63 21 ROTARY The Rotary effect simulates the sound of the rotary speakers often used with the electric organs of the past Since the move
180. is Delay 1 3 Time 0 1300 ms note input into the tap delay until the delay sound is heard Proportion of the delay sound Delay 3 Feedback 98 98 that is to be returned to the input of the tap delay negative values invert the phase Delay HF Damp 200 8000 Hz BYPASS Frequency at which the low fre quency content of the tap delay sound will be cut BYPASS no cut Delay 1 Pan L64 63R Panning of the tap delay sounds Delay 2 Pan 9 Pose 0 127 Volume of the tap delay sounds low Gain 15 415 dB of boost cut for the low requency range High Gain 15 415 dB Amount of boost cut for the high requency range Balance D100 0W D0 100W Volume balance of the original di sound D and delay sound W Level 0 127 Output volume 51 SHUFFLE DELAY Adds a shuffle to the delay sound giving the sound a bouncy delay effect with a swing feel Lin Feedback Rin Parameter Value Description I 0 2600 ms Adjusts the time until the delay sound is Delay Time note heard Adjusts the ratio as a percentage of the time that elapses before Delay B sounds rel Shuffle 5 ative to the time that elapses before the De 0 100 Rate lay A sounds When set to 100 the delay times are the same Adjusts the speed which the Delay Time Acceleration 0 15 changes from the current setting to its speci fied new setting Adjusts the amount of the delay
181. ity that might be present in your body before handling USB memory Do not touch the terminals with your fingers or any metal object Important notes Do not bend or drop USB memory or subject it to strong impact Do not leave USB memory in direct sunlight or in locations such as a closed up automobile Storage temperature 0 50 degrees Do not allow USB memory to become wet Do not disassemble or modify USB memory When connecting USB memory position it horizontally with the USB memory connector and insert it without using excessive force The USB memory connector may be damaged if you use excessive force when inserting USB memory Do not insert anything other than USB memory e g wire coins other types of device into the USB memory connector Doing so will damage the USB memory connector Do not apply excessive force to the connected USB memory Attach the USB memory cover when you re not using USB memory Handling CD ROMs Avoid touching or scratching the shiny underside encoded surface of the disc Damaged or dirty CD ROM discs may not be read properly Keep your discs clean using a commercially available CD cleaner Copyright Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation The screen shots in this document are used in compliance with the guidelines of the Microsoft Corporation Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation All product names menti
182. ject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit For Canada NOTICE This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations AVIS Cet appareil num rique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du R glement sur le mat riel brouilleur du Canada For the USA DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Compliance Information Statement Model Name Prelude Type of Equipment Music Keyboard Responsible Party Roland Corporation U S Address 5100 S Eastern Avenue Los Angeles CA 90040 2938 Telephone 323 890 3700 For C A US Proposition 65 WARNING This product contains chemicals known to cause cancer birth defects and other reproductive harm including lead Roland 602 00 0322 01 RES 692 08 Owner s Manual E Prelude
183. k 89899 Adjusts the proportion of the de lay sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will in vert the phase 200 8000 Hz Delay HF Damp BYPASS Adjusts the frequency above which sound fed back to the effect will be cut If you do not want to cut the high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Delay Balance D100 0W DO 100W Adjusts the volume balance between the sound that is sent through the de lay W and the sound that is not sent through the delay D Balance D Balance D Parameter Value Description Chorus Pre Adjusts the delay time from the di 0 0 100 0 ms rect sound until the chorus sound is Delay heard Chorus Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz note Frequency of modulation Chorus Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation Chorus Balance D100 0W DO 100W Volume balance between the di rect sound D and the chorus sound W Adjusts the delay time from the di rect sound until the delay sound is heard Adjusts the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the ef fect Negative settings will invert the phase Delay Time 0 2600 ms note Dela Q Feedback 98 98 200 8000 Hz Delay HF Damp BYPASS Adiusts the frequency qbove which sound fed bock to the effect will be cut If you do not want to cut the high frequencies set this parame ter to BYPASS Adjusts the volume balance be tween the sound that is sent Delo
184. ll3 mf Cowbell3 f Wood Block Wood Block2H Scratch 1 Wood Block2L Scratch 2 Claves Scratch 3 TR808 Claves Scratch 4 Claves 2 Scratch 5 CR78 Beat Scratch 6 Castanet Scratch 7 Whistle Scratch 9 Whistle Long Scratch 10 Whistle Shrt Aah Formant Bongo Hi Mt Eeh Formant Bongo Hi 51 lih Formant Bongo Lo Sip Ooh Formant Bongo Hi Op Uuh Formant Bongo Lo Op Metal Vox W1 Conga Hi Mt Metal Vox W2 Conga Lo Mt Metal Vox W3 Conga Hi 51 JD Gamelan 1 Conga Lo Sip JD Gamelan 2 Conga Hi Op JD Gamelan 3 Conga Lo Op JD Gamelan 4 Conga SIp Op JD Gamelan 5 Conga Efx JD Gamelan 6 Conga Thumb JD Gamelan 7 Conga 2H Op JD Gamelan 8 Conga 2H Mt JD Gamelan 9 Conga 2H Sip JD Gamelan10 Conga 2L Op JD Gamelan11 Conga 2L Mt JD Gamelani2 Timbale 1 Cajon 1 Timbale 2 Cajon 2 Timbare 3 Cajon 3 Timbare 4 Cajon 4 Cabasa Up SprgDrm Hit Cabasa Down Cuica Cabasa Cut Cuica 2 Hi Cabasa2 Cuica 2 Low Cabasa2Cut Shaker m Maracas 808 Maracas R8 Shaker Guiro 1 Guiro 2 Guiro Long Guiro 2 Up Guiro 2 Down Guiro 2 Fast Vibraslap Tamborine 1 Tamborine2 Tamborine3 Tamborine4 f Tamborine4 CR78 Tamb Timpani p Timpani f Timpani Roll Timpani Lp ConcertBD p ConcertBD f ConcertBD ff ConcertBD Lp Triangle 10p Triangle 1Mt Triangle 2 Tibet Cymbal Wind Chime Crotale 2 36 E a
185. m TR909 Clap 1 MG Zap 10 Amb Snr2 f Dirty Snr 6 Reg OHH f Reg H TomFlm TR909 Clap 2 MG Zap 11 Piccolo Snr Dirty Snr 7 Reg OHH ff Jazz Lo Tom TR707 Clap MG Blip Maple Snr Grit Snr 1 Rock CHH1 mf Jazz Mid Tom Cheap Clap Beam HiQ Reg Snr Gst Grit Snr 2 Rock CHH1 f Jazz Hi Tom Mix Clap 1 MG Attack Sft Snr Gst Grit Snr 3 Rock CHH2 mf Jazz Lo Fim Mix Clap 2 Syn Low Atk1 Jazz Snr p LoBit SnrFim Rock CHH2 f Jazz Mid Fim Mix Clap 3 Syn Low Atk2 Jz Brsh Slap Lo Bit Snr 1 Rock OHH Jazz Hi Fim Mix Clap 4 Syn Hrd Atk1 Jz Brsh Swsh Dirty Snr 3 Lo Bit CHH 1 Sharp Lo Tom Dist Clap Syn Hrd Atk2 Swish amp Turn p Lo Bit Snr 2 Lo Bit CHH 2 Sharp Hi Tom Dist Clap 2 Syn Hrd Atk3 Swish amp Turn f Analog Snr 1 Lo Bit CHH 3 Dry Lo Tom Crash Cym1 p Syn Hrd Atk4 Concert SD Tiny Snare Lo Bit CHH 4 TR909 Tom Crash Cym1 f Syn Mtl Atk1 Snr Roll Lp R amp B ShrtSnr1 Lo Bit CHH 5 TR909 DstTom Crash Cym 2 Syn Mtl Atk2 BrushRoll Lp TR808 Snr 1 HipHop CHH TR808 Tom Rock Crash 1 Syn Swt Atk1 WDSnrp TR808 Snr 2 TR909 CHH 1 TR606 Tom Rock Crash 2 Syn Swt Atk2 WD Snr mf TR808 Snr 3 TR909 CHH 2 Deep Tom Splash Cym Syn Swt Atk3 WD Snr f TR606 Snr 1 TR808 CHH 1 RR F Tom mp Jazz Crash Syn Swt Atk4 WD Snr ff MrchCmp Snr TR808 CHH 2 RR F Tom f Ride Cymbal Syn Swt Atk5 WD Rim p Reggae Snr TR606 CHH 1 RR F Tom ff Ride Bell Syn Swt Atk6 WD Rim mf DR660 Snr TR606 CHH 2 LD L Tom mf Rock Rd Cup Syn Swt Atk7 WD Rim f Jngl pkt Snr TR606 DstCHH LD L Tom f Rock Rd Edge R8 Click WD Rim ff Pocket Snr Noise CHH LD
186. m be loaded into the Prelude All All data will be loaded into the Prelude The amount of data loaded into the Prelude will depend on the amount of free memory in the Prelude A confirmation window will appear If you do not want to load the data press EXIT 5 Press ENTER to load the data NOTE Any file with a name consisting of seventeen or more characters not including the filename extension cannot be loaded into the Prelude Deleting user data that you loaded To delete User Styles refer to Deleting a User Style p 25 To delete User Songs refer to Deleting a Song p 29 Data Structure in USB Memory The folders and files that will be created are as follows Root directory ROLAND folder SOUND folder L Prelude svd SONG folder L mid STYLE folder L sti PLAYLIST folder L PLAYLIST scp UPDATE folder Updater ROM folder The folders and files created on USB memory will be visible from your computer By manipulating the files from your computer you can do the following things You can place SMF files in the SONG folder and import them into the Prelude p 48 You can drag and drop files from the SONG folder to copy them You can place Style files in the STYLE folder and import them into the Prelude p 48 You can drag and drop files from the STYLE folder to copy them You can place SMF mp3 AIFF and Wave files in the root directory to
187. m write completed message NOTE The System settings are saved in the System memory and can be imported exported to from the USB memory s Sound System folder p 48 System Parameters SYSTEM GENERAL Parameter Value Explanation 4153 Adjusts the tuning of the lis Prelude The displayed value is the Tune 466 2Hz frequency of the key middle Local P Switch OFF ON Refer to Local Switch p 42 System 6 45 Transposes the pitch of the Prelude in Transpose semitone steps NORMAL The pitch bend lever will operate in the conventional way If you play a note when the pitch bend lever is already moved to one side the pitch will sound as though the lever were in the center position Bend Mode CATCHs When the lever passes through the LAST center position it will once again begin affecting the pitch This will apply only to the most recently played note You can use this to simulate the double bending technique of an electric guitarist OFF 5 Set the time minutes until the screen Screen 10 60 saver begins working If this is Saver Time min OFF the screen saver will not appear USB VENDER Refer to Making the Settings for the Driver GENERIC USB Driver p 44 SYSTEM PEDAL Parameter Value Explanation Selects the function that will be controlled when you press a separately available pedal conne
188. mber and name of the Tone selected for the Upper Part 7 The measure number and tempo or time of the Song PLAYLIST SELECT Screen In the Main screen select the PLAYLIST icon and press ENTER to access the PLAYLIST SELECT screen ra 2 USB Memory Playlist Library NeuPlaslistz 1 SA L 1351 ists 1 PLAYLIST list In the list choose playlist and press p gt the cursor will move fo the icon in the right side of the screen Select an icon and press ENTER to perform the following operations NOTE Playlists that show a at the left of the name don t allow you to edit the playlist settings or the settings of the songs in the playlist 2 P INFO icon Displays information for the currently selected playlist Backing Track Functions SONG SELECT Screen In the Main screen select the SONG icon and press ENTER to access the SONG SELECT screen 1 SELEC ONewPlaslisti 221 AM gt gt 3 INF 4 change 5 DELETE 6 1 The name of the currently selected playlist 2 Song List Select a song from the list and press p to move the cursor to the icons in the right side of the screen Select an icon and press ENTER to perform the following operations 3 P INFO icon Displays information for the currently selected playlist 4 S INFO icon Displays information for the currently selected song 5 CHANGE icon Changes the playback order of the currently sel
189. me length of reverberation Adjusts the frequency above which the reverberant sound will be cut As the frequency is set lower more of the high frequencies HF Damp 200 S000 Hz will be cut resulting in a softer BYPASS and more muted reverberance If you do not want to cut the high frequencies set this pa rameter to BYPASS Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range I Volume balance between the direct Balance D100 0W D0 100W sound D and the reverb sound W Level 0 127 Output Level DUE nae Step Pitch Shifter Step Pitch Shifter Rin R out Parameter Range Explanation S Amount of pitch shift at each step Step 01 16 24 12 semi semitone units Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz note Rote at which the 16 step se i quence will cycle 77 ru GATED REVERB This is a special type of reverb in which the reverberant sound is cut off before its natural length L in D CO Gated Reverb L x Rin R out Balance D Parameter Value Description Type of reverb NORMAL conventional gat ed reverb T NORMAL REVERSE REVERSE bockwords reverb ype SWEEP1 SWEEP2 SWEEP1 the reverberant sound moves from right to left SWEEP2 the reverberant sound moves from left to right Adjusts the delay time from the Pre Delay 0 0 100 0 ms direct sound until the reverb sound is heard Gat
190. ment of the high range and low range rotors can be set independently the unique type of modulation characteristic of these speakers can be simulated quite closely This effect is most suitable for electric organ Patches Lin gt L out R in gt R out Parameter Value Description Simultaneously switch the rotational speed of the low frequency rotor and high frequency rotor Speed SLOW FAST SLOW Slows down the rotation to the Slow Rate FAST Speeds up the rotation to the Fast Rate Woor Slow 0 05 10 00 Hz Slow speed SLOW of the low fre peed quency rotor Woofer Fast 0 05 10 00 Hz Fast speed FAST of the low fre peed quency rotor Adjusts the time it takes the low fre quency rotor to reach the newly se Woofer 0 15 lected speed when switching from Acceleration fast to slow or slow to fast speed Lower values will require longer times Woofer Level 0 127 Volume of the low frequency rotor Tweeter Slow 1005 1000 Hz Speed Tweeter Fast 0 05 10 00 Hz Settings of the high frequency rotor Speed The parameters are the same as Tweeter for the low frequency rotor 0 15 Acceleration Tweeter Level 0 127 Separation 0 127 Spatial dispersion of the sound Level 0 127 Output Level Eg VK ROTARY This type provides modified response for the rotary speaker with the low end boosted further This effect features the same specifications as the VK 7 s builtin rotary speaker Lin R
191. n the knob toward the right to brighten the sound or toward the left to darken the sound Mono Poly MONO Only the last played note will sound This setting is effective when playing a solo instrument patch such as sax or flute POLY Two or more notes can be played simultaneously TONE Uses the Tone s Mono Poly setting Parameter Legato Switch Value OFF ON TONE Explanation This setting specifies whether the Legato Switch will be used ON or not OFF Legato Switch is valid when the Mono Poly parameter is set to MONO With the Legato Switch ON pressing a key while continuing to press a previous key causes the note to change pitch to the pitch of the most recently pressed key sounding all the while This creates a smooth transition between notes which is effective when you wish to simulate the hammering on and pulling off techniques used by a guitarist When TONE is selected the Tone s own settings take effect Portamento Switch OFF ON TONE Specifies whether portamento will be applied ON or not OFF When is selected the Tone s own settings take effect Portamento Time 0 127 TONE Adjusts the speed at which the pitch will change when portamento is used Higher settings will lengthen the time over which the pitch changes to the next note When is selected the Tone s own settings take ef
192. n in semitone steps p 21 29 MELODY INTELL button Press this button to add an automatic counter melody second and third voice to your solos or melodies 22 MODE section 30 TONE button Press this button when you want to select or edit a Tone p 20 Tones you edit are stored in the Performance 31 PERFORM button Press this button when you want to select or edit a Performance p 36 32 ONE TOUCH button This applies the recommended sound settings for the currently selected Style p 26 33 USB IMPORT button You can use USB memory to add Tones or update the system p 49 34 PIANO SPECIAL Tone Select buttons 0 19 Use these buttons to select Tones by category p 20 You can also input numerical values with these buttons when the NUMERIC button is on p 16 Panel Descriptions Rear Panel 12 LCD CONTRAST knob Adjusts the display s contrast p 16 MIDI OUT IN connectors Connect MIDI devices to these connectors p 42 CONTROL PEDAL jack Connect a separately available pedal switch Roland DP Series a separately available foot switch BOSS FS 5U or a separately available expression pedal Roland EV 5 to this jack p 15 p 36 HOLD PEDAL jack Connect a separately available pedal switch Roland DP Series to this jack p 15 EXT INPUT jack Connect a portable audio player or other audio source to thise mini jack p 15 p 18 PRELUDE 6 OUTPU
193. nately select the first character of a character set uppercase A lowercase a or numerals and symbols 0 1 Deletes the character at the cursor location 2 Inserts a space at the cursor location 4 Turn the VALUE dial to select the desired destination and then press ENTER A confirmation window will appear 5 Press ENTER to save the Performance If you press EXIT you re returned to the previous screen without the Performance being saved Other Functions Related to Performance cf gt Style Playing with an Accompaniment p 24 Bend Mode p 45 Saving User Data to USB Memory Backup p 48 Loading User Data Saved on USB Memory Import p 48 39 Performance Functions and Effects Effect Parameters Using Reverb Chorus and Parameter Explanation Value Specifies the amount of chorus that will be Upper applied to the sound of MFX Chorus the Upper Part that has 0 127 Send passed through MFX Set this to 0 if you don t want to apply chorus Specifies the amount of reverb that will be Upper applied to the sound of MFX Reverb the Upper Part that has 0 127 Send passed through MFX Set this to O if you don t want to apply reverb Specifies the amount of chorus that will be Lower applied to the sound of MFX Chorus the Lower Part that has 0 127 Sond passed through Set this to O if you don t want to apply
194. nd 1 Press KEY TOUCH so the button is lit The Key Touch window will open 2 Use the cursor buttons to select the item that you want to change and use the VALUE dial to change the value Parameter Value Explanation Select this setting if you do not LIGHT want velocity changes to bring about major volume changes Medium velocity sensitivity The keyboard responds to velocity changes but the maximum vol ume can be obtained more easily than with HEAVY MEDIUM Select this setting for maximum ex Curve pressiveness Even small varia tions of the force with which you strike a key produce audible changes The tradeoff is howev er that you have to strike the keys forcefully to achieve the maximum volume HEAVY Select this setting if all notes you FIXED play on the keyboard should have the same velocity value Keyboard Mode Functions Parameter Explanation Specifies the volume value used Vawe when Curve is set to FIXED 3 When you ve finished making settings press KEY TOUCH once again or to close the window If you want to keep this setting press WRITE to store it into the Performance p 39 Shifting the Keyboard Pitch in Octave Steps OCTAVE Buttons You can shift the pitch of the currently selected Tone upward or downward in steps of an octave over a maximum of four octaves upward or downward 1 Press OCTAVE lt q or
195. nd then pressing ENTER Choosing from the Style List 1 In the Main screen use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the Style number d Press ENTER 3 Use lt q p gt to select a Style genre To select a User style select USER or press USER 4 Use 11 V Jor the VALUE dial to select a Style 5 Press ENTER to set the Style If you press EXIT without pressing ENTER the list will close without the currently selected Style being changed Adding User Styles Importing from USB memory Style data saved on USB memory can be imported into the Prelude Before you continue the Style data you created on your computer using the included StyleConverter software must be saved to USB memory For details refer to Loading User Data Saved on USB Memory Import p 48 Deleting a User Style Here s how you can delete the specified Style or all Styles from User Style memory Press MENU Use 11 V J to select Utility then press ENTER Use the cursor buttons to select Delete then press ENTER P oO N Use the cursor buttons to select Style or All Styles then press ENTER 5 If you selected Style in step 4 use the VALUE dial or AIL V J to select the Style that you want to delete then press ENTER A confirmation window will appear 25 Backing Track Functions 6 Press ENTER to delete the Style s If you press EXIT you re returned to the previo
196. ne 2 SOUND FX 121 1 1129 DoorCreaking SOUND FX 121 2 1130 Door SOUND FX 121 3 1131 Scratch SOUND FX 121 4 1132 Wind Chimes SOUND FX 121 5 1133 Helicopter SOUND FX 121 0 126 1134 Car Engine SOUND FX 121 1 1135 Car Stop SOUND FX 121 2 1136 Car Pass SOUND FX 121 3 1137 Car Crash SOUND FX 121 4 1138 Siren SOUND FX 121 5 1139 Train SOUND FX 121 6 1140 Jetplane SOUND FX 121 7 1141 Starship SOUND FX 121 8 1142 Burst Noise SOUND FX T23 9 1143 Applause SOUND FX 121 0 127 1144 Laughing SOUND FX 121 1 1145 Screaming SOUND FX 121 2 1146 Punch SOUND FX 121 3 1147 Heart Beat SOUND FX 121 4 1148 Footsteps SOUND FX 121 5 1149 Gun Shot SOUND FX 121 0 128 1150 Machine Gun SOUND FX 121 1 1151 Lasergun SOUND FX 121 2 91 Rhythm Set List Preset Group Tone No Name 1153 GW Std Kit 1154 WD Std Kit 1155 LD Std Kit 1156 TY Std Kit 1157 StandardKit1 1158 StandardKit2 1159 StandardKit3 1160 Rock Kit 1 1161 Rock Kit 2 1162 Brush Jz Kit 1163 Orch Kit 1164 909 808 Kit 1165 Limiter Kit 1166 HipHop Kit 1 1167 R amp B Kit 1168 HiFi R amp B Kit 1169 Machine Kit 1170 KitEuro POP TIZI House Kit 1172 Nu Technica 1173 Machine Kit2 1174 ArtificalKit 1175 Noise Kit 1176 Kick Menu 1177 Snare Menu 1178 Snr Rim Menu 1179 HiHat Menu 1180 Tom Menu 1181 Clp amp Cym amp Hit 1182 FX SFX Menu 1183 Percussion 1184 Scrh amp Voi amp Wld 92 GM Group Tone No Name
197. ne Tambourine Punch 55 SplashCymbal SplashCymbal Heart Beat Cowbell Cowbell Footsteps 1 57 CrashCymbal2 Concert Cym2 Footsteps 2 ES Vibra slap Vibra slap Applause Ride Cymbal2 Concert Cym1 Door Creak c4 60 High Bongo High Bongo Door si Low Bongo Low Bongo Scratch 62 MuteHi Conga MuteHi Conga Wind Chimes EE OpenHi Conga OpenHi Conga Car Engine 64 Low Conga Low Conga Car Stop 65 High Timbale High Timbale Car Pass _ Low Timbale Low Timbale Car Crash 67 High Agogo High Agogo Siren Low Agogo Low Agogo Train 69 Cabasa Cabasa Jetplane 7 Maracas Maracas Helicopter 71 ShortWhistle ShortWhistle Starship C572 Long Whistle Long Whistle Gun Shot El Short Guiro Short Guiro Machine Gun 74 Long Guiro Long Guiro Lasergun TEM Claves Claves Explosion 76 Hi WoodBlock Hi WoodBlock Dog 77 LowWoodBlock LowWoodBlock Horse Gallop Mute Cuica Mute Cuica Birds 79 Rain EW MuteTriangle MuteTriangle Thunder 81 OpenTriangle OpenTriangle Wind TEM Shaker Shaker Seashore 83 Jingle Bell Jingle Bell Stream c6 84 Bell Tree Bell Tree Bubble EE Castanets Castanets 86 Mute Surdo Mute Surdo EM Open Surdo Open Suri 88 Applause 100 101 Chord Intelligence Constituent notes of this chord Keys yo
198. ne number and then pressing ENTER Choosing from the Tone list 1 In Main screen use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the Tone number 2 Press ENTER 3 Use 1I V Jor the VALUE dial to select a Tone You can press one of the TONE SELECT buttons PIANO SPECIAL to select a Tone by category gt Press ENTER to set the Tone If you press EXIT without pressing ENTER the list will close without the currently selected Tone being changed You can use p gt to select a sub category within the currently selected category You can edit the currently selected Tone and store it in the Performance For details refer to Editing a Tone p 38 and Saving a Performance WRITE p 39 Switching to an Arabian Scale or Other Temperament As an alternative to the temperament commonly used in Western music you can adjust the pitch of each note to create temperaments used in other musical cultures or historical periods e g Oriental temperaments or temperaments used in the Baroque era You can independently adjust the pitch of each note in the octave C C D Eb E F F G Ab A Bb B 1 Hold down the TRANSPOSE button and press the KEY TOUCH button The Key Scale window will open 2 Use the cursor buttons to select the item that you want to change and use the VALUE dial to change the value Parameter Explanation Value E
199. ng SONG You can use the 16 track recorder of the Prelude to record your own performances You can record your keyboard performance while listening to an accompaniment and then listen to the playback of your recorded performance NOTE Recorded performances are discarded when another Song is selected or when the power is turned off If you don t want to lose the Song you must save it p 28 On the Prelude there are two ways to record a Song Refer to Recording in the Main screen 26 Refer to Recording a specified Part SONG TRACK 27 lt n Song settings e g tempo and time signature are determined by the settings of the Style that s saved in the selected Performance You ll probably find it convenient to first select the Style and Tones that you want to use p 36 If you are performing without using a Style you can specify the tempo and time signature of the Song in the SONG TRACK screen p 27 Recording in the Main screen If you want to record the Style playback as well turn STYLE on Recording will start stop simultaneously when you start stop the Style If you want to record only your keyboard performance without playing a Style turn SONG on If STYLE and SONG are both turned off the rhythm pattern of the Style selected by the STYLE FAMILY buttons will be recorded together with the keyboard performance If you want to record your performance after
200. nit Before moving the unit disconnect the AC adaptor and all cords coming from external devices Before using the unit in a foreign country consult with your retailer the nearest Roland Service Center or an authorized Roland distributor as listed on the Information page gt Before cleaning the unit turn off the power and unplug the AC adaptor from the outlet p 14 DO NOT play a CD ROM disc on a conventional audio CD player The resulting sound may be of a level that could cause permanent hearing loss Damage to speakers or other system components may result Whenever you suspect the possibility of lightning in your area disconnect the AC adaptor from the outlet Important notes In addition to the items listed under Using the unit safely p 3 please read and observe the following Power Supply Do not connect this unit to same electrical outlet thot is being used by an electrical appliance that is controlled by an inverter such as a refrigerator washing machine microwave oven or air condi tioner or that contains a motor Depending on the way in which the electrical appliance is used power supply noise may cause this unit to malfunction or may produce audible noise If it is not practical to use a separate electrical outlet connect a power supply noise filter between this unit and the electrical outlet The AC adaptor will begin to generate heat after long hours of c
201. nte com o lixo dom stico Dit symbool geeft aan dat in landen van de EU dit product gescheiden van huishoudelijk afval moet worden aangeboden zoals bepaald per gemeente of regio Producten die van dit symbool zijn voorzien mogen niet samen met huishoudelijk afval worden verwijderd Dette symbol angiver at i EU lande skal dette produkt opsamles adskilt fra husholdningsaffald som defineret i hver enkelt region Produkter med dette symbol m ikke smides ud sammen med husholdningsaffald Dette symbolet indikerer at produktet m behandles som spesialavfall i EU land iht til retningslinjer for den enkelte regionen og ikke kastes sammen med vanlig husholdningsavfall Produkter som er merket med dette symbolet ma ikke kastes sammen med vanlig husholdningsavfall oO O O O O O O O O O Symbolen anger att i EU l nder m ste den har produkten kasseras separat fr n hush llsavfall i enlighet med varje regions best mmelser Produkter med den h r symbolen far inte kasseras tillsammans med hush llsavfall T m merkint ilmaisee ett tuote on EU maissa ker tt v erill n kotitalousj tteist kunkin alueen voimassa olevien m r ysten mukaisesti T ll merkinn ll varustettuja tuotteita ei saa h vitt kotitalousj tteiden mukana Ez a szimb lum azt jelenti hogy az Eur pai Uni ban ezt a term ket a h ztart si hullad kt l elk l n tve az adott r gi ban rv nyes szab lyoz s szerint kell gy jteni Az ezz
202. number and name of the currently selected Style or of the currently selected Song 2 The group number and name of the currently selected Performance 3 The number and name of the Tone selected for the Lower Part 4 The number and name of the Tone selected for the Upper Part 5 The measure number tempo and time signature of the Style or Song 6 Chord indication Window The somewhat smaller screens that appear temporarily on top of the normal screens are called windows Various types of windows appears according to the situation Some display allow you to make settings and others ask you to confirm an operation STYLI m PERFORM PRST Style Temro Metronome BO1HUN LOWER 0199 Cmpid J 134 Press EXIT to close the window Some windows will close automatically when an operation is performed Listening to the Demo Songs 1 Press MENU 2 Usel 1I V 1 to select Demo Play then press ENTER 3 Use the cursor buttons to select the song you want to hear then press ENTER Press PIANO 0 to play back all of the demo songs 4 Press START STOP to stop demo playback 5 Press EXIT to return to the Main screen NOTE All rights reserved Unauthorized use of this material for purposes other than private personal enjoyment is a violation of applicable laws NOTE No data for the music that is played will be output from MIDI OUT Restoring the
203. o rr A single screen or window displays multiple parameters or items for selection To edit the setting of a parameter move the cursor to the value of that parameter To select an item move the cursor to that item When selected with the cursor a parameter value or other selection is highlighted Move the cursor with the lt A LI and gt cursor buttons Changing a value ee o oo oo o oo oo ooo oo ooo oo oo To change the value use the VALUE dial Entering numerical values NUMERIC If you turn NUMERIC on you ll be able to use the TONE SELECT buttons PIANO SPECIAL to enter numerical values This is convenient when selecting Tones p 20 Styles p 25 Performances p 36 or Songs p 29 1 Use the cursor buttons or STYLE SONG TONE or PERFORM to move the cursor to the numerical value you want to change 2 Press NUMERIC All of the TONE SELECT buttons will light 3 Use the TONE SELECT buttons to enter the desired value and press ENTER Main Screen The following screen which appears after you turn on the power is called the Main screen This screen will be shown most of the time you re performing with the Prelude 1 STYLE gt PERFORM PRST 2 Beati LOWER 0199 UPPER 0001 6 Cmp d Fna Rich Grand 131 HUN BEATS TMeas 5 4134 4 4 3 4 1
204. o the appropriate section for the problem you are experiencing Problem Check Solution Page Is the included AC adaptor power cord correctly connected to an AC outlet and to the Prelude tT 14 Ser Does ein Do not use any AC adaptor and power cord other than the one included P Doing so will cause malfunctions Could the VOLUME knob be turned down If playing the keyboard does not produce sound could Local Switch be turned No Sound from the Prelud Te er Turn Local Switch P Could pedal operations or MIDI messages exclusive or volume received from M an external MIDI device have lowered the volume Could the volume of the Part be turned down 24 Adjust the volume parameters in the PERFORM MIXER screen Could you have used the Minus One function to mute silence a specific Part p 30 No Sound f Specific Part dicic E Does the MIDI receive channel of the part match the MIDI transmit channel of the connected MIDI device p 42 Set the MIDI channel of the connected external device to match the p 45 Prelude Are MIDI messages being transmitted p 43 Turn MIDI TxRx to a setting other than OFF p 45 No Sound from a Connected MIDI Does the MIDI transmit channel of the Prelude s keyboard controller section Device match the MIDI receive channel of the connected MIDI device p 43 Set the MIDI channel of the connected external device to match the p
205. of the microphone Direct Level 0 127 Volume of the direct sound Level 0 127 Output Level Specifications of each Speaker Type The speaker column indicates the diameter of each speaker unit in inches and the number of units voice Lin L out 7 Pan L P Y Pan R Rin R out Parameter Value Description Drive Sw OFF ON Turns Drive on off Degree of distortion Drive ui Also changes the volume n i Vowe 829 i pud Selects the vowel Vowel2 q e i o u Rote onl 0 00Hz Freguency at which the two vowels switch Depth 0 127 Effect depth Input Syne Determines whether the LFO for switching 5 OFF the vowels is reset by the input signal ON w or not OFF Input Syne 0 127 Volume level at which reset is applied Cabinet Speaker SMALL 1 small open back enclosure 10 dynamic SMALL 2 small open back enclosure 10 dynamic MIDDLE open back enclosure 12x 1 dynamic JC 120 open back enclosure 12x2 dynamic BUILT IN 1 open back enclosure 12x2 dynamic BUILT IN 2 open back enclosure 12x2 condenser BUILT IN 3 open back enclosure 12x2 condenser BUILT IN 4 open back enclosure 12x2 condenser BUILT IN 5 open back enclosure 12x2 condenser BG STACK 1 sealed enclosure 12x2 condenser BG STACK 2 large sealed enclosure 12x2 condenser MS STACK 1 large sealed enclosure 12x4 condenser MS STACK 2 large sealed enclos
206. of the original sound increas es cutting the original sound Attack 0 127 alee time it takes for the gate to fully open after being triggered Adjusts the time it takes for the gate to start Hold 0 127 closing after the source sound falls beneath the Threshold Release 0 127 Adjusts the time it takes the gate to fully close after the hold time Balance D100 0W Volume balance between the direct sound DO 100W D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level ee DELAY This is a stereo delay When Feedback Mode is NORMAL Feedback Feedback Lin Feedback Feedback Rin Balance D Parameter Value Description Delay Left 0 1300 ms Adjusts the time until the delay sound is Delay Right note heard Phase Left NORMAL Phase Right INVERSE Phase of the delay sound Feedback NORMAL Selects the way in which delay sound is fed Mode CROSS back into the effect See the figures above Adjusts the amount of the delay sound that s Feedback 98 98 fed back into the effect Negative settings invert the phase Adjusts the frequency above which sound fed HF Dam 200 8000 Hz back to the effect is filtered out If you don t P BYPASS want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low frequency range High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high frequency range Balance D100 0W Volume balance between
207. on P The pitch will rise when you bring your hand BEND UP closer to the D Beam The pitch will return to the original level when you take your hand away The pitch will fall when you bring your hand BEND DOWN closer to the D Beam The pitch will return to the original level when you take your hand away When you bring your hand closer to the D Beam the volume of the keyboard performance will EXP UP increase and the pitch will rise The pitch and volume will return to the original level when you take your hand away When you bring your hand closer to the D Beam EXP the volume of the keyboard performance will DOWN increase and the pitch will fall The pitch and volume will return to the original level when you take your hand away The tempo will become faster when you bring TEMPO Yo hand closer to the D Beam The tempo will return to the original value when you take your hand away The tempo will become slower when you bring TEMPO your hand closer to the D Beam The tempo will DOWN return to the original value when you take your hand away START ues will start es 1 UA m hand STOP over the D Beam Playback will stop when you position your hand over the D Beam once again FILL UP If you position your hand over the D Beam while FILL DOWN the backing is playing a fill in will sound p 24 If you position your hand over the D Beam the volume will begin decreasing and will then reach FADE OUT zero The backing performance will st
208. oncert SD TR909 Snr 2 Jazz Lo Tom1 Reg F Tom Sharp L Tom1 Reg F Tom 1 Timpani F TR909 Tom L Reg CHH 1 Reg CHH 1 Rock CHH 1 Reg CHH 1 Timpani F TR909 CHH 1 Jazz Lo Tom2 Reg L Tom Sharp L Tom2 Reg L Tom 1 Timpani G TR909 Tom L Reg CHH 2 Reg CHH 2 Reg PHH Reg CHH 2 Timpani G TR909 PHH 1 Jazz Mid Tom Reg M Tom Sharp L Tom3 Reg M Tom 1 Timpani A TR909 Tom M Reg OHH Reg OHH Rock OHH Reg OHH Timpani A TR909 OHH 2 Jazz Mid Tom Reg M TomFim Sharp H Tom1 Reg M Tom 1 Timpani B TR909 Tom M Jazz Hi Tom Reg H Tom Sharp H Tom2 Reg H Tom 1 Timpani C TR909 Tom H Crash Cym1 Crash 1 Crash Cym1 Jazz Crash Timpani C TR909 Crash Jazz Hi Tom Reg H TomFlm Sharp H Tom3 Reg H Tom 1 Timpani D TR909 Tom H Rock Rd Edge Rock Ride 1 Ride Cymbal Jazz Ride 1 Timpani D TR909 Ride 1 China Cymbal China Cymbal China Cymbal China Cym 1 Timpani E TR909 Crash1 Rock Rd Cup Splash Cym Ride Bell Ride Edge Timpani f TR909 Ride 2 Tamborine Tamborine Tamborine 3 Tamborine Tamborine 3 CR78 Tamb 1 Splash Cym Rock Crash 1 Rock Crash 2 Crash Cym Concert Cym TR909 Crash2 Cowbell Cowbell Hi Cowbell Mute Cowbell Low Cowbell Mute JD Sm Metal Rock Crash 2 Crash Cymib Splash Cym Crash Cym Concert Cym2 TR909 Ride 3 TR808 Cym Cowbell Low Cowbell Cowbell Hi Ride Cymbal Syn Swt Atk3 Jazz Ride Rock Ride 2 Rock Rd Cup Ride Bell Crash Cym1 TR808 Kick 1 Bongo Hi Conga Hi Mt Conga Hi Mt Conga Hi Mt Bongo Hi Op TR808 Kick 2 Bongo Lo Conga Lo Mt Conga Lo Mt Conga Lo Mt Bongo Lo Op TR808 Rim Conga Hi Mt Cong
209. oned in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners MMP Moore Microprocessor Portfolio refers to a patent portfolio concerned with microprocessor architecture which was developed by Technology Properties Limited TPL Roland has licensed this technology from the TPL Group MPEG Layer 3 audio compression technology is licensed from Fraunhofer IIS Corporation and THOMSON Multimedia Corpo ration MatrixQuest 2008 TEPCO UQUEST LTD All MatrixQuest rights reserved The Prelude s USB functionality uses Matrix Quest middleware technology from TEPCO UQUEST LTD Main Features The Ideal Music Keyboard for Entertainment High quality sounds The latest sounds generated by a top level sound generator with 128 voice polyphony High quality localized sounds Three backing functions that assist your performances High quality Music Style engine with the latest Styles O Four variations each for Intro Main and Ending O Included StyleConverter software lets you create Styles on your computer Styles you ve created can be installed in the Prelude as User Styles via USB memory USB Memory Player function lets you play MP3 WAV AIFF SMF data O You can apply the Center Cancel function to audio or enjoy minus one performance using SMF data O Included Playlist Editor software lets you create playlists on your computer You can easily create a playlist for each of your p
210. onsecutive use This is normal and is not a cause for concern Before connecting this unit to other devices turn off the power to all units This will help prevent malfunctions and or damage to speakers or other devices This device may interfere with radio and television reception Do not use this device in the vicinity of such receivers Noise may be produced if wireless communications devices such as cell phones are operated in the vicinity of the Prelude Such noise could occur when receiving or initiating a call or while conversing Should you experience such problems you should relocate such wireless devices so they are at a greater distance from this unit or switch them off Placement Using the unit near power amplifiers or other equipment containing large power transformers may induce hum To alleviate the problem change the orientation of this unit or move it farther away from the source of interference This device may interfere with radio and television reception Do not use this device in the vicinity of such receivers Noise may be produced if wireless communications devices such as cell phones are operated in the vicinity of this unit Such noise could occur when receiving or initiating a call or while conversing Should you experience such problems you should relocate such wireless devices so they are at a greater distance from this unit or switch them off Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight place it
211. op and then the original volume will return after two or three seconds The sound becomes brighter when you bring FILTER your hand closer to the D Beam It becomes rounder when you take your hand away The volume will increase when you bring your VOLUME hand closer to the D Beam The volume will NOTE D Beam functions marked with an song return to the original level when you take your hand away UKU cannot be recorded in a 35 Performance Functions and Effects NOTE If you turn off the power while the D BEAM screen is displayed the D Beam setting you chose will not be remembered by the Prelude You must press EXIT before you turn off the power Pitch Bend and Modulation Lever The Pitch Bend Modulation lever located at the left of the keyboard can be used to apply two types of effect to the sound you re playing in Keyboard mode Pitch Bend is an effect that lowers the pitch of the sound you re playing when you move the lever toward the left or raises it when you move the lever toward the right Modulation is an effect that applies vibrato to the sound you re playing when you push the lever away from yourself If the MFX type is ROTARY this will switch the rotational speed instead of Modulation 7 Pitch Bend Modulation If you press the lever away from yourself while moving it fo left or right both effects will be applied at the same time i The extent of the pitch change can be assi
212. order to complete the USB connection correctly user name belonging to the Administrators group such as Administrator user name whose account type is a computer administrator NOTE Do not connect two or more Prelude units to one computer via USB The system will not operate correctly with such connections NOTE The file name for a Style or Song that can be used by the Prelude must be no longer than sixteen characters not including the filename extension You can use the following characters A Z0 9 1 amp A_ You must assign a filename extension of stl to Style files and a filename extension of mid to Song files Depending on the type of characters you use it may not be possible to display the file name in some cases If connection to your computer is unsuccessful eee Normally you don t need to install a driver in order to connect the Prelude to your computer However if some problem occurs or if the performance is poor using the Roland original driver may solve the problem For details on downloading and installing the Roland original driver refer to the Roland website Roland website http www roland com Caution To avoid the risk of malfunction and or speaker damage always make sure to turn the volume all the way down and turn off the power on all equipment before you make any connections Only MIDI data can be transmitted and received via USB A USB c
213. oser Applause will continue sounding as long as your APPLAUSE hand is positioned above the D Beam The volume will increase as you move your hand closer Laughter will sound when you position your hand LAUGH ING over the D Beam The volume is greater when you move your hand more rapidly A scream will sound when you position your SCREAM i ING and over the D Beam The volume is greater when you move your hand more rapidly A bird call will sound when you position your BIRD hand over the D Beam The volume is greater when you move your hand more rapidly A dog s bark will sound when you position your DOG hand over the D Beam The volume is greater when you move your hand more rapidly SEA Surf will sound when you position your hand SHORE over the D Beam The volume will increase as you move your hand closer The sound of rain will continue as long as your RAIN hand is positioned above the D Beam The volume will increase as you move your hand closer A thunder will sound when you position your THUNDER hand over the D Beam The volume will increase as you move your hand closer MODULA The D Beam controller will apply the same effect TION as the Modulation lever p 36 The volume will increase when you bring your EXPRES hand closer to the D Beam The volume will SION return to the original level when you take your hand away Performance Functions and Effects D Beam Explanation functi
214. out are forbidden The specific thing that must improperly not be done is indicated by the design contained within the circle In the case of the symbol at left it means that Z CAUTION Material damage refers to damage or tha unit m stneverba disassembled other adverse effects caused with respect to the home and all its The symbol alerts the user to things that must be furnishings as well to domestic animals carried out The specific thing that must be done is or pets indicated by the design contained within the circle In the case of the symbol at left it means that the power cord plug must be unplugged from the outlet ALWAYS OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING When using the unit with a rack or stand recom mended by Roland the rack or stand must be carefully placed so it is level and sure to remain NWARNING E RM E for modify any woy the unit or its AC stable If not using a rack or stand you still need to make sure that any location you choose for placing the unit provides a level surface that will properly support the unit and keep it from wobbling Do not attempt to repair the unit or replace parts sure to use only the AC adaptor supplied with the within it except when this manual provides specific unit Also make sure the line voltage ot the instal instructions directing you to do so Refer all servicing input voltage specified on A
215. p 102 a user Performance You can specify chords in the 1 Press MENU Chord following four ways Mode Major chords Play the root note 2 Usel 1I V 1to select Perform Edit then press ENTER of the chord Minor chords Play the root note 3 Usel II V to select a parameter and turn the VALUE and the black key located at its dial to select the value EASY left Seventh chords Play the root note 4 When you ve finished making settings press EXIT and the white key located at its The Main screen will appear left Minor seventh chords Play the Lef gt root note black key at left Saving a Performance WRITE p 39 white key at left Performance Parameters Selects how the backing part will sound Parameter Value Explanation When yat left side of the keyboard Specifies the Split Point the key at OFF instrumental sounds other than the which the keyboard will be drums of the backing part will Split Point C 2 C7 divided used in Split mode This Backing stop only the rhythm part will will be the highest note of the Hold continue sounding L Port ITO The chord you played in the left Raises or lowers the pitch in steps hand will be remembered The of one octave for the Upper Tone ON backing will continue playing In the case of a rhythm set with that chord until you play Upper 4 4 this does not transpose the another chord pitch rather it shifts the set of Specifies how
216. pitch shifter in which the amount of pitch shift is varied by a 16 step sequence Parameter Range Explanation Speed at which the amount of Attack aid pitch shift changes between steps Gate Time 0 127 Duration of the pitch shifted sound at each step Fine 100 4100 cent DEA for all steps Delay time from the original Delay Time 0 1300 ms note sound until the pitch shifted sound is heard Proportion of the pitch shifted sound Feedback 98 98 that is to be returned to the input negative values invert the phase Low Gain 15 415 dB Amount of boost cut for the low requency range High Gain 15 415 dB Amour of boost cut for the high reguency range Bal D100 0W D0 100W Volume balance of the original sound Sens MADRE 0 and pitch shifted sound W Level 0 127 Output volume ru REVERB Adds reverberation to the sound simulating an acoustic space L in O L out Balance D 2 Rin R out Balance D Parameter Value Description Type of reverb ROOMI dense reverb with short decay ROOM2 sparse reverb with short decay ROOMI ROOM2 STAGE reverb with greater Type STAGE1 STAGE2 late reverberation HALL1 HALL2 STAGE2 reverb with strong early reflections HALLI reverb with clear rever berance HALL2 reverb with rich rever berance Adjusts the delay time from the di Pre Delay 0 0 100 0 ms rect sound until the reverb sound is heard Time 0 127 Ti
217. qual Tuning This tuning divides the octave into 12 equal parts and Preset i Press Equal is the most widely used method of ENTER temperament used in Western mu sic Arabic Scale In this scale E and B are a quarter note lower and C F and G are a quarter note high er compared to equal tempera ment The intervals between and Press ka B C and E F and G Bb and C ENTER and Eb and F have a natural third the interval between a major third and a minor third On the GW 8 you can use Arabian temperament in the three keys of G C and F the K Lower Sw Use the Key Scale for the Lower OFF ON Part the K le for th Upper Sw Use the Key Scale for the Upper OFF ON Part Style Sw Use the Key Scale for the Style Part OFF ON C Key Scale C 64 63 C Key Scale C 64 63 D Key Scale D 64 63 Eb Key Scale Eb 64 63 E Key Scale E 64 63 F Key Scale F 64 63 Parameter Explanation Value F Key Scale F 64 63 G Key Scale G 64 63 G Key Scale G 64 63 A Key Scale A 64 63 Bb Key Scale Bb 64 63 B Key Scale B 64 63 3 When yov ve finished making settings press EXIT once to close the window Changing the Key Touch IKEY TOUCH This setting determines how the volume changes in response to the force used to play the keyboard Velocity Sensitivity Ay The velocity the force with which you play the keyboard can affect the volume or timbre of a sou
218. quency at which the high fre 200 8000 Hz quency content of the delayed Delay HF Damp BYPASS sound of delay 1 will be cut BY PASS no cul Delay time from when sound is Delay2 Time 0 1300 ms note input to delay 2 until the delay sound is heard Proportion of the delay sound Delay2 98 98 that is to be returned to the input Feedback AETS of delay 2 negative values invert the phase Frequency at which the high fre 200 8000 Hz quency content of the delayed Delay2 HF Damp BYPASS sound of delay 2 will be cut BY PASS no cut Pan L64 63R Panning of the delay sound Low Gain 15 415 dB Amount of boost cut for the low requency range High Gain 15 415 dB Amo of boost cut for the high reguency range Balance D100 0W_DO 100W Volume balance of the original sound and delay sound W Level 0 127 Output volume 71 ru MODULATION DELAY Adds modulation to the delayed sound When Feedback Mode is NORMAL Feedback Feedback Balance D When Feedback Mode is CROSS L in Feedback Feedback Rin Balance D Parameter Value Description Delay Left 0 1300 ms Adjusts the time until the delay sound is Delay Right note heard Feedback NORMAL Selects the way in which delay sound is fed Mode CROSS back into the effect See the figures above Adjusts the amount of the delay sound Feedback 98 98 that s fed back into the effect N
219. quency of modulation Chorus Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation Adjusts the volume balance between Chorus Balance D100 0W the sound that is sent through the cho rus W and the sound that is not sent through the chorus D Level 0 127 Output Level ENHANCER FLANGER Balance D Lin L out J Balance W Balance W Rin R out Mix Balance D Parameter Value Description Enhancer Sens 0 127 Sensitivity of the enhancer Enhancer Mix 0 127 of the overtones generated the enhancer Adjusts the delay time from when Flanger Pre Delay 0 0 100 0 ms the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Flanger Rate bam Frequency of modulation Flanger Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation Adjusts the proportion of the flanger sound that is fed back into Flanger Feedback 98 98 the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Adjusts the volume balance between Flanger Balance D100 0W the sound that is sent through the 9 flanger W and sound that is not sent through the flanger D Level 0 127 Output Level 79 ENHANCER DELAY Lin Mix Balance D Parameter Value Description Enhancer Sens 0 127 Sensitivity of the enhancer Enhancer Mix 0 127 Level of the overtones generated by the enhancer Delay Time 0 2600 ms note Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the delay sound is heard Delay Feedback 982989 Adj
220. r avah EU zbirati lo eno od gospodinjskih odpadkov tako kot je dolo eno v vsaki regiji Proizvoda s tem znakom ni dovoljeno odlagati skupaj z gospodinjskimi odpadki To o pupoXo auto vro ni ver OT y posc E E ouyzexou vo va OVAAEYETAL ovuox ATOEO LLATA ca mooB movrou og 0 MEQLOYH mou PEQOVV TO ouyxexouu vo obupoXo dev ANOQQ TTOVTAL MALI ue ovaox For China AAP m tE ie Ae M NERA AS ZS i Pres n o 3 f quE 3 CEA E FPE P Es FB H ffe KRME STA RAE SMR Ed IL m PIE A RA BS RBS Be AN OA WE R 56 SRR TO JAB P BO DEW EE KAEH KAFEA SE Jolla REO fs E Pitas MAKER W Z Vd ATE RA AIC ARA I CR TCR BEAR BR Pb 2 Hg ia Cd Cr VD LIRIKA PBB w 30 PBDE Shae Cif x BFR CUI S x x HJ ACUI AC gs x O Xem EH SEHE RR ESAE BUG RACE Ew rA VR Be SERRE ABET
221. red interval The tempo setting window will appear and the tempo will be specified by the interval at which you pressed the button You also specify the tempo by pressing TEMPO to access the tempo setting window and then using the cursor buttons and VALUE dial to specify the tempo Press EXIT to close the tempo setting window Using the metronome 1 Press TAP TEMPO The tempo setting window will appear 2 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to Metronome and use the VALUE dial to turn it on When you turn the metronome on it will begin sounding depending on the metronome mode you selected Always REC or Play 3 To stop the metronome turn off Metronome 4 Press EXIT to return to the Main screen For details on volume and other settings for the metronome refer to Using the Metronome p 22 23 Backing Track Functions Style Playing with an Accompaniment Playing Back a Style STYLE 1 Press STYLE so the button is lit At this time the keyboard Split Point will be set to CA the default setting If you press and hold SPLIT for approximately two seconds the Split Point setting screen will appear You can turn the VALUE dial to change the Split Point When you re finished press EXIT 2 Press START STOP the drums will start playing If you re not using the lower area of the keyboard the Lower Part area to
222. rosoft Windows Vista This does not work with the 64 bit Edition of Windows Vista CPU Clock Pentium Celeron processor 1 GHz or higher RAM 512 MB or more Hard Disk 2 MB or more Display 800 x 600 or higher Colors 65 536 colors 16 bit High Color or more Others CD ROM Drive Playlist Editor System Requirements Operating Microsoft Windows XP System Microsoft Windows Vista This does not work with the 64 bit Edition of Windows Vista CPU Clock Pentium Celeron processor 1 GHz or higher RAM 512 MB or more Hard Disk 10 MB or more Display Colors 1024 x 768 or higher 24 bit Full Color or more Others CD ROM Drive While under most conditions a computer similar to the above will permit normal operation of the Prelude applications Roland cannot guarantee compatibility solely on these factors This is due to numerous variables that may influence the processing environment such as differences in motherboard design and the particular combination of other devices involved In the interest of product improvement the specifications and or appearance of this unit are subject to change without prior notice All rights reserved Unauthorized use of this material for purposes other than private personal enjoyment is a violation of applicable laws OUT No data for the music that is played will be output from MIDI 105 Index A AG Adaptor tht rs 2A co a ltt on ie
223. rotale 3 TR909 Kick 2 Cowbell Hi TR909 D TomH Syn Swt Atk1 Cabasa Cut MG Zap 6b AnalogKick 2 MG Zap 7 AnalogKick 3 MG Zap 7 R8 Shaker Syn Low Atk2 TR909 Kick 3 Conga Hi Mt AnalogKick 5 808 Maracas AnalogKick 1 808 Maracas AnalogKick 3 Conga Lo Mt Club Clap TR808 Claves PlasticKick2 TR808 Claves AnalogKick 4 Conga Lo Sip TR808 Snr 7 Triangle Mt PlasticKick3 Triangle Mt AnalogKick 5 Conga Hi Op TR808 Snr 3 Triangle Op TR909 Kick 1 Triangle Op AnalogKick 6 Conga Lo Op TR909 Snr 6a Euro Hit AnalogKick 4 Dry Lo Tom TR606DstKick Timbale Hi TR909 CHH 2 Scratch 4 AnalogKick 6 Conga Thumb TR909 Kick 5 Timbale Low TR606DstCHH2 Brt Strat C TR909 Snr 2 Funk Gtr SH32 Kick Agogo Bell H Dance CHH Crotale TR909 Snr 4 Digi Loop 1 TR707 Kick Agogo Bell L TR606 PHH 2b MG Zap 4 TR909 Snr 5 MG Zap 4c TR909 Kick 6 Cabasa Down TR909 OHH 2 Urbn SnRoll2 TR909 Snr 6 Urbn SnRoll2 Mix Kick 1 Maracas TR606 OHH Calc Saw TR808 Snr 1 Sweep Saw Mix Kick 2 Guiro Short CR78 OHH White Noise TR808 Snr 2 White Noise Mix Kick 3 Guiro Long Juno Sqr HD Blow Loop TR808 CHH 1 Monsoon Mix Kick 4 Claves TR909 Snr 6b Shaker 2 TR808 OHH 1 Shaker 3 Mix Kick 5 Wood Block L TR808 Kick Shaker 3 TR909 CHH 2 Scream Dry Kick 4 Wood Block H JD EML 5th 2 Cajon 1 TR909 OHH 2 Cajon 1 Sweep Bass Triangle Mt TR707 Clap Euro Hit Lite CHH Euro Hit Vint Kick Triangle Op Dist Clap Laugh Lite OHH Laugh Small Kick Castanet MG Zap 5 Office Phone TR606 Cym 2c ConcertBD Whistle MG Zap 7b Door Creak China Cymbal Timp
224. s the maximum value that can be specified when setting the delay time as a numerical value note Sixtyfourth note triplet Sixty fourth note Thity second note triplet Thirty second note Sixteenth note triplet Dotted thirty second note Sixteenth note Eighth note triplet Dotted sixteenth note Eighth note Quarter note triplet 2 Dotted eighth note Quarter note Halfnote triplet 4 Dotted quarter note Half note es Whole note triplet J Dotted half note o Whole note Double note triplet e Dotted whole note Double note Reverb Parameters These settings allow you to select the desired type of reverb and its characteristics Parameter Value Description Type of reverb O OFF Reverb is not used 1 REVERB Normal reverb O OFF 2 SRV ROOM This simulates typical room REVERB acoustic reflections Reverb 2 SRV ROOM 3 SRV HALL This simulates typical concert Type 3 SRV HALL hall acoustic reflections 4 SRV PLATE 4 SRV PLATE This simulates a reverb 5 GM2 REVERB plate a popular type of artificial reverb unit that derives its sound from the vibration of a metallic plate 5 GM2 REVERB GM2 Reverb Parameter Value Description 05 GM2 REVERB Character 0 7 Type of reverb 0 5 reverb 6 7 delay Cuts the high frequency range of the sound coming into the reverb
225. selecting any internal song imported from USB memory refer to Re recording Your Performance p 28 To record a new Song use the Song Initializing operation Refer to Recording a specified Part SONG TRACK 27 The following procedure allows you to record your performance 1 Select the Performance that you want to use p 36 2 Press SONG REC SONG REC will blink 3 Press B gt l to start recording 26 Even without pressing B gt 11 recording starts when you play on the keyboard 1 if the SYNC START button is lit or 2 if you start playing using the Upper or Lower part while the CountIn parameter is set to WAIT NOTE 28 4 Perform 5 Press B gt II to stop recording When you stop recording the SONG TRACK screen will appear If you want to continue recording refer to step 7 and following of Recording a specified Part SONG TRACK below or step 3 and following of Re recording Your Performance 28 Press EXIT to return to the Main screen NOTE 40 will apply only to the realtime performance of the Part Upper Part or Lower Part you play by hand Be aware that MFX will not apply to the recorded Song data A performance you record using a Style is recorded to parts 1 16 as follows Track Part Name Track Part Name 1 Accomp 1 9 Accomp 6 2 Accomp bass 10 Accomp drums 3 Accomp 2 11 Lower Part
226. sound quality The sound quality grows poorer as this value is increased Type of filter OFF no filter is used OFF LPF LPF cuts the frequency range above the Filter Type HPF Cutoff HPF cuts the frequency range below the Cutoff Filter Cutoff 200 8000 Hz Center frequency of the filter x Noise WHITE PINK Switch between white noise and pink noise Parameter Value Description W P Noise 200 8000 Hz Center frequency of the low pass filter applied LPF BYPASS to the white pink noise BYPASS no cut WAA Noise 0 127 Volume of the white pink noise Type o record noise Noise RD SP The freguency at which the noise is heard ype depends on the selected type Adjusts the cutoff frequency of the low pass Disc Noise 200 8000 Hz filter applied to the record noise If you don t LPF BYPASS want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Duc hone 0 127 Volume of the record noise Level Noise 50 Hz 60 Hz Frequency of the hum noise Type Hum Noise 200 8000 Hz Center frequency of the low pass filter ap LPF BYPASS plied to the hum noise BYPASS no cut Hum Noise 0 127 Volume of the hum noise Level Low Goin 15 15 dB Gain of the low range High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Balance D100 0W Volume balance between the direct sound DO 100W D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level LOFI COMPRESS This is an e
227. ss SYNTH BASS 87 66 2 82 Strat Gtr EL GUITAR 87 65 54 259 Glide iator SYNTH BASS 87 66 3 83 Touch Drive DIST GUITAR 87 65 55 260 SC AcidPunch SYNTH BASS 87 66 4 84 SC Chunk DIST GUITAR 87 65 56 261 TBasic SYNTH BASS 87 66 5 85 Trem o Vibe DIST GUITAR 87 65 57 262 SC Unison Bs SYNTH BASS 87 66 6 86 LP Dist DIST GUITAR 87 65 58 263 Detune Bass SYNTH BASS 87 66 7 87 Hurtling Gtr DIST GUITAR 87 65 59 264 Lo Bass SYNTH BASS 87 66 8 88 Searing COSM DIST GUITAR 87 65 60 265 SC GarageBs1 SYNTH BASS 87 66 9 89 SC Loud Gtr DIST GUITAR 87 65 61 266 SC GarageBs2 SYNTH BASS 87 66 0 90 SC Plugged DIST GUITAR 87 65 62 267 Sub Sonic SYNTH BASS 87 66 1 91 Punker 1 DIST GUITAR 87 65 63 268 SC Jungle Bs SYNTH BASS 87 66 2 92 SC PowerChd DIST GUITAR 87 65 64 269 R amp B Bass 4 SYNTH BASS 87 66 3 93 Punker 2 DIST GUITAR 87 65 65 270 Simply Basic SYNTH BASS 87 66 4 94 Larsen Aft DIST GUITAR 87 65 66 271 Beepin Bass SYNTH BASS 87 66 5 95 Rockin Dly DIST GUITAR 87 65 67 272 MC TB Bass SYNTH BASS 87 66 6 96 Sonic Ac Bs BASS 87 65 68 273 Bass SYNTH BASS 87 66 7 97 Ulti Ac Bass BASS 87 65 69 274 Loco SYNTH BASS 87 66 8 98 Downright Bs BASS 87 65 70 275 Unplug it SYNTH BASS 87 66 9 99 Cmp d Fng Bs BASS 87 65 71 276 S amp H Bass SYNTH BASS 87 66 20 200 Sonic Fng Bs BASS 87 65 72 277 Destroyed Bs SYNTH BASS 87 66
228. ssssee 24 STYLE CONTROL buttons 10 24 STYLE FAMILY buttons 10 25 Style bist a n a epo red Bu 25 SYNG buttons uu a an tere ds 10 SYNC START 2 5 2 559 E a ete 25 SYNG STOP iret ete tem ees 25 System memory eee 13 System Paramielters certet ER Eee te 45 System Settings Ju naa ul Su Ge e 45 System settings that are not stored 47 System Transpose kasa 45 System Version Info screens 47 TAP TEMPO a 10 23 Temperament ira 0 ree eme enm ees 20 Tempo en e SOR e ete 23 Temporary area rire es 13 TONE TE 11 20 Tone u IO eO Ob E ws 13 20 Editing HH 38 20 Parameters 38 a yas 84 TONE SELECT buttons 11 20 TRANSPOSE u a teer 11 TRANSPOSE ite Putin ta 21 Transpose sce dope ee es 21 Tx Channel tiii rede e A3 TX Glock coetui n We 43 Tx Modulation a si tsi er tte c t ba 43 Tx Pitch Bend esee epe nee ots 43 Tx Progr m Change 1 23 2 43 Te Song Posion 2 5 ua Au awka s 43 iei rtt tt b t 43 U UPPER MEX 2
229. stages in the phaser Adjusts the basic frequency from Manual 0 127 which the sound will be modulat ed Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz note Frequency of modulation Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation Parameter Value Description Selects whether the left and right phase of the modulation will be the same or the opposite INVERSE The left and right phase will be opposite When Polarity BCLS using a mono source this spreads the sound SYNCHRO The left and right phase will be the same Select this when inputting a stereo source Resonance 0 127 Amount of feedback Adjusts the proportion of the Cross phaser sound that is fed back Feedback 28198 into the effect Negative set tings will invert the phase Step Rate 0 10 20 00 Hz note Rate of the step wise change in the phaser effect Mix 0 127 Level of the phase shifted sound Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Level 0 127 Output Level STAGE PHASER Extremely high settings of the phase difference produce a deep phaser effect L in gt L out c Multi Stage Fan Phaser d Pan R Rin gt R out Resonance Parameter Value Description 4 STAGE 8 STAGE Mode 12 STAGE 16 STAGE Number of phaser stages 20 STAGE 24 STAGE Adjusts the basic frequency Manual 0 127 from which the sound will be modulated Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz note Frequency of modulation
230. stranza OTHER SYNTH 87 69 52 616 Riff PULSATING 87 68 04 693 AfiTch Ji n OTHER SYNTH 87 69 53 617 Pulsator PULSATING 87 68 05 694 JP OctAttack OTHER SYNTH 87 69 54 618 Motion Bass PULSATING 87 68 06 695 Oct Unison OTHER SYNTH 87 69 55 619 Sine Magic PULSATING 87 68 07 696 Xtatic OTHER SYNTH 87 69 56 620 JunoD Slice PULSATING 87 68 08 697 Dirty Combo OTHER SYNTH 87 69 57 621 Pulsatron PULSATING 87 68 09 698 FM s Attack OTHER SYNTH 87 69 58 622 Mega Sync PULSATING 87 68 10 699 Digi vox Syn OTHER SYNTH 87 69 59 623 Passing by SYNTH FX 87 68 11 700 Fairy Factor OTHER SYNTH 87 69 60 624 Lazer Points SYNTH FX 87 68 12 701 Tempest OTHER SYNTH 87 69 61 625 Retro Sci Fi SYNTH FX 87 68 13 702 XRacer OTHER SYNTH 87 69 62 626 Magic Chime SYNTH FX 87 68 14 703 TB Booster OTHER SYNTH 87 69 63 627 SC Try This SYNTH FX 87 68 15 704 Syn Orch Mod OTHER SYNTH 87 69 64 628 New Planetz SYNTH FX 87 68 16 705 Pressyn OTHER SYNTH 87 69 65 629 Jet Noise SYNTH FX 87 68 17 706 High Five OTHER SYNTH 87 69 66 630 Chaos 2003 SYNTH FX 87 68 18 707 4DaCommonMan OTHER SYNTH 87 69 67 631 Control Room SYNTH FX 87 68 19 708 Orgaenia OTHER SYNTH 87 69 68 632 OutOf sortz SYNTH FX 87 68 20 709 Sleeper OTHER SYNTH 87 69 69 633 Scatter SYNTH FX 87 68 21 710 Sugar Synth OTHER SYNTH 87 69 70 634 Low Beat
231. t L out gt R out Parameter Value Description I Degree o distortion Drive Oe Also changes the volume Type of guitar amp SMALL small amp BUILT IN single unit type amp Amp Type SMALE BULUN 2 STACK large double stack amp 3 STACK large triple stack amp Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Stereo location of the output Pan L64 63R Level 0 127 Output Level EN DISTORTION Produces a more intense distortion than Overdrive The parameters are the same as for 35 OVERDRIVE L in gt L out 7 Pan L CY Pan R gt R out 38 VS DISTORTION This is a distortion effect that provides heavy distortion The parameters are the same as for 37 VS OVERDRIVE Lin gt L out 7 Pan L Distortion Amp Simulator Y Pan R Rin gt R out SUITAR AMP SIMULATOR This is an effect that simulates the sound of a guitar amplifier Lin gt L out 7 Pan L Speaker R Rin gt R out Parameter Value Description Pre Amp Sw OFF ON Turns the amp switch on off JC 120 CLEAN TWIN MATCH DRIVE BG LEAD MS1959I Pre Amp T MS1959ll 519591 Tope SLDN LEAD mew P METAL5 150 METAL LEAD OD 1 OD 2 TURBO DISTORTION FUZZ Pre Amp Volume and amount of distortion 0 127 Volume of the amp Pre Amp 0 127 Volume of the entire pre amp Pre Amp
232. t has been formatted as FAT If your USB memory was formatted using any other method please re format it using FAT Check the file name The file name for a Style or Song that can be used by the Prelude must be Songs or Styles saved on USB _ longer than sixteen characters not including the filename extension h ou can use the following characters memory are not shown 70 91 amp _ e You must assign a filename extension of stl to Style files and a filename extension of mid to Song files This may be due to the following reasons The file type of the song is not one of the file types that the Prelude can 30 t pl Songa wen t may be that the song data is damaged p 49 54 Songs cannot be played if you directly add delete modify the song data in the ROLAND folder without using Playlist Editor Error Messages If an incorrect operation is performed or if processing could not be performed as you specified an error message will appear Refer to the explanation for the error message that appears and take the appropriate action Message Meaning Action USB Memory Not Ready USB memory is not connected Connect USB memory The data could not be read Load the data once again Failed to load data from USB memory Make sure that USB memory is correctly connected Read Error It may be that the file is damaged Do not use this file This file cannot be loa
233. t is recommended by Roland permanent hearing loss Do not operate for a long period of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears you should immediately stop using the unit and consult an audiologist Q NWARNING Do not allow any objects e g flammable material coins pins or liquids of any kind water soft drinks etc to penetrate the unit Immediately turn the power off remove the AC adaptor from the outlet and request servicing by your retailer the nearest Roland Service Center or an authorized Roland distributor as listed on the Information page when gt N CAUTION The unit and the AC adaptor should be located so their location or position does not interfere with their proper ventilation N The Prelude is for use only with a Roland KS 12 stand or cart Use with other stands or carts is capable of resulting in instability causing possible injury gt Always grasp only the plug on the AC adaptor when plugging into or unplugging from an outlet or this unit The AC adaptor the power supply cord or the plug has been damaged or At regular intervals you should unplug the AC adaptor and clean it by using a dry cloth to wipe all dust and other accumulations away from its prongs Also disconnect the power plug from the power outlet whenever the unit is to remain unused
234. ternal input Center Cancel 18 MINUS ONE CENTER CANCEL button on off p 30 p 32 System Settings Viewing Information about Prelude System Version Info Screens Here s how to view information about the Prelude such as its software version Press MENU 2 Use 11 V 1 select Version then press ENTER 3 Use lt q 1 p gt to select a page You can view information about the imported Special Tones as well as the version of software used by the Prelude Press EXIT to return to the Main screen gt 47 Using USB Memory You can save Prelude user data to USB memory i e back up data or load data from USB memory into the Prelude Data you ve downloaded to your computer can also be saved to USB memory and then loaded into the Prelude NOTE Carefully insert the USB memory all the way in until it is firmly in place Initializing USB Memory USB Memory Format Here s how to initialize the USB memory This operation is called USB Memory Format USB memory cannot be used with the Prelude unless it is formatted suitably for the Prelude NOTE This operation will erase all data on your USB memory Use this operation with caution 1 Press MENU 2 Use V to select Utility then press ENTER 3 Use the cursor buttons to select USB Memory Format then press ENTER A confirmation window will appear If you do not want to format the USB memor
235. that s fed Feedback 98 98 back into the effect Negative settings in vert the phase Adjusts the frequency above which sound HF Dam 200 8000 Hz fed back to the effect is filtered out If you P BYPASS don t want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Pan A B 0 127 Stereo location of Delay A B Level A B 0 127 Volume of delay A B Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low frequency range High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high frequency range Balance D100 0W Volume balance between the direct sound DO 100W D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 73 52 3D DELAY This applies a 3D effect to the delay sound The delay sound will be positioned 90 degrees left and 90 degrees right L out 3D Delay L Feedback 3D Delay R R out Parameter Value Description Delay Left Adjusts the delay time from the Delay Right 0 2600 ms note direct sound until the delay Delay Center sound is heard Adjusts the proportion of the de Center 98 98 lay sound that is fed back into the Feedback WA effect Negative settings will invert the phase Adjusts the frequency above which sound fed back to the ef HF Damp 200 8000 Hz BYPASS fect will be cut If you do not want to cut the high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Left Level Right Level 0 127 Output level of the delay sound Center Level Adjusts the me
236. the direct sound DO 100W D and the delay sound W Level 0 127 Output level LONG DELAY A delay that provides a long delay time Rin Parameter Range Explanation Delay time from when the origi Delay Time 0 2600 ms note nal sound is heard to when the delay sound is heard Phase of the delay NORMAL Phase NORMAL INVERSE non inverted INVERT inverted Parameter Range Explanation Proportion of the delay sound Feedback 98 98 that is to be returned to the input negative values invert the phase Frequency at which the high fre HF Dam 200 8000 Hz quency content of the delayed amp BYPASS sound will be cut BYPASS no cut Pan L64 63R Panning of the delay sound low Gain 15 415 dB of boost cut for the high requency range High Gain 15 415 dB of boost cut for high requency range Balance D100 0W D0 100W Volume balance of the original i sound D and delay sound W Level 0 127 Output volume SERIAL DELAY This delay connects two delay units in series Feedback can be applied independently to each delay unit allowing you to produce complex delay sounds Parameter Range Explanation Delay time from when sound is Delay Time 0 1300 ms note input to delay 1 until the delay sound is heard Proportion of the delay sound Delay 3 that is to be returned to the input 98 98 Feedback of delay 1 negative values invert the phase Fre
237. thod that will be used to hear the sound that is out put to the OUTPUT jacks The opti Output Mode SPEAKER PHONES mal 3D effect will be achieved if you select SPEAKER when using speakers or PHONES when using headphones Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Volume balance between the direct Balance DU On Ee sound D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output Level Time crat DELAY A stereo delay in which the delay time can be varied smoothly aa 2 Band EQ L out a Time Ctrl Delay m O PanL Feedback Feedback TA Time Ctrl Delay E L in Rin 2 Band EQ Parameter Value Description Delay Time 0 1300 ms note Adjusts the time until the delay is heard Adjusts the speed which the Delay Time changes from the current setting to a Acceleration 0 15 specitied new setting The rate of change for the Delay Time directly affects the rate of pitch change Adjusts the amount of the delay Feedback 98 98 that s fed back into the effect Neg ative settings invert the phase Parameter Value Description Adjusts the frequency above which sound fed back to the effect is fil HF Damp ROM Hz tered out If you do not want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low frequency range High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high frequency ran
238. tons Use these buttons to adjust the volume balance between the backing and the keyboard p 23 PART VIEW button Use this to adjust the volume etc of each part p 24 27 STYLE PRST Meas 0001 2 120 4 4 Gil SteadyRock PERFORM PRST 901 SteadyRock LOWER PR G Qj UPPER PR A 101 St Pianol St Pianol 10 SONG REC button Press this button to record a Song p 26 11 STYLE CONTROL buttons Use these buttons to select the desired Style pattern p 24 12 SYNC buttons These buttons allow you to start stop the Style by playing a note in the left side of the keyboard p 25 13 TAP TEMPO button Use this button to set the tempo p 23 14 VARIATION 1 4 AUTO FILL IN START STOP and SONG CONTROL buttons The operation of these buttons will depend on which BACKING TYPE button 7 currently lights If you ve used the BACKING TYPE buttons 7 to select STYLE these buttons will start stop the Style or select variations p 24 If you ve used the BACKING TYPE buttons 7 to select SONG or USB MEMORY PLAYER these buttons control the song playback as the SONG USB MEMORY PLAYER CONTROL buttons p 30 p 31 15 Display This displays various information according to the operations you perform Meas 0001 Jz120 4 4 C Maj 16 VALUE dial Use this to edit the value of the parameters settings in the screen EDIT section 17 Cursor buttons lt a 1
239. ts the delay time from the di Pre Delay 0 0 100 0 ms rect sound until the chorus sound is heard Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz note Frequency of modulation Depth 0 127 Vedan depth of the chorus ef Phase 0 180 deg Spatial spread of the sound Adjusts the method that will be used to hear the sound that is out put to the OUTPUT jacks The opti Output Mode SPEAKER PHONES mal 3D effect will be achieved if you select SPEAKER when using speakers or PHONES when using headphones Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Volume balance between the di Balance D100 0W DO 100W rect sound 0 and the chorus sound W Level 0 127 Output Level Balance D Parameter Value Description Adjusts the delay time from the Pre Delay 0 0 100 0 ms direct sound until the chorus sound is heard Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz note Frequency of modulation Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation Phase 0 180 deg Spatial spread of the sound Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Volume balance between the Balance D100 0W DO 100W direct sound D and the chorus sound W Level 0 127 Output Level EN 3D FLANGER This applies a 3D effect to the flanger sound The flanger sound will be positioned 90 degrees left and 90 degrees right 3D Flanger O Parameter Value Description Type of f
240. u need to press to hear this chord when Chord Mode in Performance Parameters is set to INTEL p 37 C C D Eb E F E AN HUD CP Cet CM7 C M7 DM7 Eb M7 EM7 FM7 TESTI AN HERI EEE EL C7 C 7 D7 Eb7 E7 F7 AN RR HT 18 TI E Cm C m Dm Ebm Em Fm AU ETUE EEUU Cm7 C m7 Dm7 Eb m7 Em7 Fm7 A uu N uN CETERO E CP CmM7 C mM7 DmM7 Eb mM7 EmM7 FmM7 MERI RR CEP TAY CEST PEOR CP Cdim C dim Ddim Eb dim Edim Fdim HUU EMT E LP EUER PEE AE Cm7 b5 C m7 b5 Dm7 b5 b5 Em7 b5 Fm7 b5 AITE EMMA E ET LUI Caug C aug Daug Eb aug Eaug Faug EE DI Csus4 C sus4 Dsus4 Eb sus4 Esus4 Fsus4 EATE ERREUR E ELLE e e EEN C7sus4 C 7sus4 D7sus4 Eb 7sus4 E7sus4 F7sus4 MEI IERI 102 Chord Intelligence Constituent notes of this chord Keys you need to press to hear this chord when Chord Mode in Performance Parameters is set to INTEL p 37 G Ab A Bb B CPP ARTETA F M7 GM7 AbM7 AM7 Bb M7 PLATTEN E ES F 7 G7 Ab7 A7 Bb7 ERE E ESPEN GLEE F m Gm Abm Am Bb m Bm CEPT AE CPP PY F m7 Gm7 Abm7 Am7 Bb m7 F mM7 GmM7 AbmM7 AmM7 Bb mM7 BmM7 PS CERE LP PLE F dim Gdim Abdim Adim Bb dim Bdim E HP TUE F m7 b5 Gm7 b5 Abm7 b5 Am7 b5 Bb m7 b5 m AGA GA PR F au
241. u stopped Selecting and playing a song from within a songlist 1 In the Main screen move the cursor to SONG in the upper line of the screen and press ENTER The songlist for the currently selected playlist will appear Alternatively you can view the songlist by selecting a playlist in step 2 of Selecting a playlist and playing it above and pressing ENTER 2 Use A 11 V 1 select the song that you want to play 3 Press B gt ll to play the selected song Press EXIT to return to the Main screen 4 To stop the song playback press B gt II If you then press B gt IIl playback will start from the point at which you stopped Selecting and playing back external songs without creating a playlist 1 After placing the SMF or Audio files in the root directory of your USB memory connect it t the Prelude and press the USB MEMORY PLAYER button 2 Use 11 V to select the USB memory folder PLAYLIST SELECT USB Memory Playlist Library A NewPlaylisti A NewPlaylist2 Q NewPlaylists 3 Press ENTER The list of the songs that you placed in the root directory appears in the display 4 Usel A 1I V 1 to select song that you want to play and press ENTER 5 Press B gt ll to play the selected song 6 To stop the song playback press B gt 1 again NOTE Songs you play back directly from the root directory of a USB memory are not availa
242. ure 12x4 condenser METAL STACK large double stack 12x4 condenser 2 STACK large double stack 12x4 condenser 3 STACK large triple stack 12x4 condenser Hs PHASER A phase shifted sound is added to the original sound and modulated L in Oma Mix Phaser Mix wa Phaser TA L out R out Parameter Value Description Mode 8 STAGE 12 Number of stages in the phaser Adjusts the basic frequency from Manual 0 127 which the sound will be modulat ed Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz note Frequency of modulation Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation Selects whether the left and right phase of the modulation will be the same or the opposite INVERSE The left and right My thos ibn oppo Whe SYNCHRO i spreads the sound SYNCHRO The left and right phase will be the same Select this when inputting a stereo source Resonance 0 127 Amount of feedback Adjusts the proportion of the Cross 98 98 phaser sound that is fed back Feedback 25062 into the effect Negative set tings will invert the phase Mix 0 127 Level of the phase shifted sound Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Level 0 127 Output Level STEP PHASER The phaser effect will be varied gradually Lin Mix Mix Step Phaser T 2 Parameter Value Description Mode DASE 8 STAGE 12 Number of
243. us screen without deleting the Style s Back up User Style Exporting to USB memory For details refer to Saving User Data to USB Memory Backup p 48 Using the Recommended Sound Settings for a Style ONE TOUCHI When STYLE is on turning ONE TOUCH on button lit will assign the most suitable Tones for the currently selected Style as the Upper Tone and Lower Tone This is called the One Touch function If ONE TOUCH is on when you switch Styles the keyboard Tones will also switch to the Tones that are most suitable for the Style you selected To turn off the One Touch function turn ONE TOUCH off button unlit The Keyboard Mode p 19 will change depending on the selected Style Switching the Style when ONE TOUCH is on will not change the Split Point p 19 NOTE The One Touch function is available only when a preset Style is selected NOTE You can t change the Tones that are assigned to each Style by the One Touch function Other Functions Related to Music Style Using Split Mode SPLIT p 19 Selecting a Tone TONE p 20 Adding Harmony to the Upper Tone MELODY INTELL p 22 Using Preset Performances p 36 Chord Mode p 37 Backing Hold p 37 Bass Inversion p 37 Pedal Assign p 45 Saving User Data to USB Memory Backup 48 Loading User Data Saved on USB Memory Import p 48 Recording a New So
244. usts the proportion of the de lay sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase 200 8000 Hz Delay HF Damp BYPASS Adjusts the frequency above which sound fed back to the ef fect will be cut If you do not want to cut the high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Delay Balance D100 0W D0 100W Adjusts the volume balance be tween the sound that is sent through the delay W and the sound that is not sent through the delay D Level 0 127 Output Level CHORUS DELAY Balance D FLANGER DELAY Balance D Lin Rin Balance D O Balance D J Balance W i la F Feedback O Balance W L out Balance W R out Balance D Parameter Value Description Flanger Pre Delay 0 0 100 0 ms Adjusts the delay time from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Flanger Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz note Frequency of modulation Flanger Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation Flanger Feedback 98 98 Adjusts the proportion of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Flanger Balance D100 0W DO 100W Volume balance between the di rect sound D and the flanger sound W Delay Time 0 2600 ms note Adjusts the delay time from the di rect sound until the delay sound is heard Delay Feedbac
245. volume and turn off the power on all devices before making any connections NOTE When connection cables with resistors are used the volume level of equipment connected to the input EXT INPUT jack may be low If this happens use connection cables that do not contain resistors Connecting the AC Adaptor 1 Make sure that the POWER switch is off 2 Move the VOLUME knob all the way to the left to minimize the volume 3 Connect the included power cord to the included AC adaptor The indicator will light when you plug the AC adaptor into an AC outlet AC adaptor Power cord Tg ge gt Indicator to an AC outlet KAA Place the AC adaptor so the side with the indicator see illustration faces upwards and the side with textual information faces downwards KAA Depending on your region the included AC adaptor may be a different type than the one shown above If so omit step 3 and proceed 4 Connect the AC adaptor to the DC IN jack on the Prelude s rear panel and then plug the AC adaptor into an electrical outlet NOTE To prevent the inadvertent disruption of power to your unit should the plug be pulled out accidentally and to avoid applying undue stress to the AC adaptor jack anchor the power cord using the cord hook as shown in the illustration Cord hook Prelude rear panel Connecting External Equipment The Prelude contains an internal amplification system but
246. when Pre Delay 0 0 100 0 ms the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz note Frequency of modulation Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation Phase 0 180 deg Spatial spread of the sound Adjusts the proportion of the 5 flanger sound that is fed back into Feedback Teo the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Volume balance between direct Balance D100 0W D0 100W sound D and the flanger sound W Level 0 127 Output Level 25 STEP FLANGER This is a flanger in which the flanger pitch changes in steps The speed at which the pitch changes can also be specified in terms of a note value of a specified tempo Balance D aa H Step Flanger Balance W Feedback Feedback d Step Flanger g Q Balance W pu L in Parameter Value Description Adjusts the delay time from when Pre Delay 0 0 100 0 ms the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz note Frequency of modulation Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation Phase 0 180 deg Spatial spread of the sound Adjusts the proportion of the flanger sound thot is fed bock into Feedback the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Step Rate 0 10 20 00 Hz note Rate period of pitch change Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range High Gain 15
247. y press EXIT 4 Press ENTER to execute the format NOTE Don t remove the USB memory until formatting is completed Saving User Data to USB Memory Backup The following user data of the Prelude can be saved on USB memory User Styles 25 User Songs 28 User Performances p 36 System settings p 45 1 Press MENU 2 Use 1I V 1to select Utility then press ENTER 3 Use the cursor buttons to select Export then press ENTER 4 Use the cursor buttons to select an item then press ENTER Item Explanation Style All user Styles will be saved to USB memory Song All user Songs will be saved to USB memory Sound User Performances and System settings will System be saved to USB memory All All user data will be saved to USB memory A confirmation window will appear If you do not want to export the data to the USB memory press EXIT 5 Press ENTER to export the data Loading User Data Saved on USB Memory Import Press MENU 2 Use V 1 select Utility then press ENTER 3 Use the cursor buttons to select Import then press ENTER 4 Use the cursor buttons to select an item then press ENTER Item Explanation Style All Style data will be loaded into the Prelude s y user Styles All Song data will be loaded into the Song Prelude s user Songs Sound User Performances and System settings will Syste
248. y D100 0W D0 100W through the delay W and the eene sound that is not sent through the delay D Level 0 127 Output Level Level 0 127 Output Level 80 CHORUS FLANGER Balance D Balance D L out J Balance W Y Balance W R out Balance D Balance D Parameter Value Description Chorus Pre Adjusts the delay time from the direct Delay 9 05109 O ms sound until the chorus sound is heard Chorus Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz note Modulation freguency of the chorus Chorus Depth 0 127 Modulation depth of the chorus effect Chorus Balance D100 0W D0 100W Volume balance between the direct sound and the chorus sound W Flanger Pre Delay 0 0 100 0 ms Adjusts the delay time from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Flanger Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz note Modulation frequency of the flanger effect SYMPATHETIC RESO SYMPATHETIC RESONANCE On an acoustic piano holding down the damper pedal allows other strings to resonate in sympathy with the notes you play creating rich and spacious resonances This effect simulates these sympathetic resonances Flanger Depth 0 127 Modulation depth of the flanger effect Adjusts the proportion of the flanger Flanger 98 98 sound that is fed back into the ef Feedback ERTS fect Negative settings will invert the phase Flanger Balance D100 0W DO
249. yResoSaws ECHNO SYNTH 87 68 11 524 R Trance ECHNO SYNTH 87 68 12 525 Braatz ECHNO SYNTH 87 68 13 526 AllinOneRiff ECHNO SYNTH 87 68 14 527 YZ Again ECHNO SYNTH 87 68 15 528 Flazzy Lead ECHNO SYNTH 87 68 16 529 Coffee Bee ECHNO SYNTH 87 68 17 530 SC 303 ECHNO SYNTH 87 68 18 531 Dance Saws ECHNO SYNTH 87 68 19 532 AluminmWires ECHNO SYNTH 87 68 20 533 Fred amp Barney ECHNO SYNTH 87 68 21 534 Electrostars ECHNO SYNTH 87 68 22 535 LoFiSequence ECHNO SYNTH 87 68 23 No Name Category MSB LSB PC 536 MelodicDrums TECHNO SYNTH 87 68 24 537 TB Wah TECHNO SYNTH 87 68 25 538 Waving TB303 TECHNO SYNTH 87 68 26 539 Digi Seq TECHNO SYNTH 87 68 27 540 Seq Saw TECHNO SYNTH 87 68 28 541 Reso Seq Saw TECHNO SYNTH 87 68 29 542 DetuneSeqSaw TECHNO SYNTH 87 68 30 543 Technotribe TECHNO SYNTH 87 68 31 544 Teethy Grit TECHNO SYNTH 87 68 32 545 Repertition TECHNO SYNTH 87 68 33 546 Killerbeez TECHNO SYNTH 87 68 34 547 Acid Lead TECHNO SYNTH 87 68 35 548 ranceformer TECHNO SYNTH 87 68 36 549 Anadroid TECHNO SYNTH 87 68 37 550 Shroomy TECHNO SYNTH 87 68 38 551 Noize R us TECHNO SYNTH 87 68 39 552 Beep Melodie TECHNO SYNTH 87 68 40 553 Morpher TECHNO SYNTH 87 68 41 554 Uni G TECHNO SYNTH 87 68 42 555 Power Synth TECHNO SYNTH 87 68 43 556 Hoover Again TECHNO SYNTH 87 68 44 557 Alpha Said TECHNO SYNTH 87 68 45 55
250. ylophone MALLET 121 0 14 929 Tubular bell BELI 121 0 15 930 Church Bell BELI 121 1 931 Carillon BELI 121 2 932 Santur PLUCKED 121 0 16 933 Organ 1 ORGAN 121 0 17 934 Trem Organ ORGAN 121 1 935 60 s Organ 1 ORGAN 121 2 936 70 s E Organ ORGAN 121 3 937 Organ 2 ORGAN 121 0 18 938 Chorus Or 2 ORGAN 121 1 939 ORGAN 121 2 940 Organ 3 ORGAN 121 0 19 941 Church Org 1 ORGAN 121 0 20 942 Church Org 2 ORGAN 121 1 943 Church Org 3 ORGAN 121 2 944 Reed Organ ORGAN 121 0 21 945 Puff Organ ORGAN 121 1 946 Accordion Fr ACCRDION 121 0 22 947 Accordion It ACCRDION 121 1 948 Harmonica HARMONICA 121 0 23 949 Bandoneon ACCRDION 121 0 24 950 Nylon str Gt AC GUITAR 121 0 25 951 Ukulele AC GUITAR 121 1 952 Nylon Gt o AC GUITAR 121 2 953 Nylon Gt 2 AC GUITAR 121 8 954 Steel str Gt AC GUITAR 121 0 26 955 12 str Gt AC GUITAR 121 1 956 Mandolin AC GUITAR 121 2 957 Steel Body AC GUITAR 121 3 958 Jazz Gt EL GUITAR 121 0 27 959 Pedal Steel EL GUITAR 121 1 960 Clean Gt EL GUITAR 121 0 28 961 Chorus Gt EL GUITAR 121 1 962 Mid Tone GTR EL GUITAR 121 2 963 Muted Gt EL GUITAR 121 0 29 964 Funk Pop EL GUITAR 121 1 965 Funk Gt 2 EL GUITAR 121 2 966 Jazz EL GUITAR 121 3 967 Overdrive Gt DIST GUITAR 121 0 30 968 Guitar Pinch DIST GUITAR 121 1 969 DistortionGt DIST GUITAR 121 0 31 970 Feedback Gt DIST GUITAR 12
251. ype amp STACK STACK 2 STACK large double stack amp 3 STACK large triple stack amp Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range High Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Pan L64 63R Stereo location of the output sound Level 0 127 Output Level 69 Specifications for each Speaker Type The speaker column indicates the diameter of each speaker unit in inches and the number of units Type Cabinet pod Ma er phone SMALL 1 small open back enclosure 10 dynamic SMALL 2 small open back enclosure 10 dynamic MIDDLE open back enclosure 12x1 dynamic JC 120 open back enclosure 12x2 dynamic BUILT IN 1 open back enclosure 12x2 dynamic BUILT IN 2 open back enclosure 12x2 condenser BUILT IN 3 open back enclosure 12x2 condenser BUILT IN 4 open back enclosure 12x2 condenser BUILT IN 5 open back enclosure 12x2 condenser BG STACK 1 sealed enclosure 12x2 condenser BG STACK 2 large sealed enclosure 12x2 condenser MS STACK 1 large sealed enclosure 12x4 condenser MS STACK 2 large sealed enclosure 12x 4 condenser METAL STACK large double stack 12 4 condenser 2 STACK large double stack 12x 4 condenser 3 STACK large triple stack 12x4 condenser ra COMPRESSOR Flattens out high levels and boosts low levels smoothing out fluctuations in volume Lin 2 Band EQ L out am LIMITER Compresses signals that exceed a specified volume level pr

Roland Prelude User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents